JP2022190150A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with which the amusement of a game can be improved.

SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation. Operations of stop switches 42-44 stop a corresponding reel, which can stop a stop pattern of symbols according to a lottery result. A push sequence notification may be carried out in a push sequence combination winning in which a prize result differs depending on an operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44. When a condition defined according to an increase number of medals is satisfied in an advantageous section in which the push sequence notification is carried out, an MY high probability mode is set in which an additional winning probability of an AT mode is improved.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media;
bet amount setting means for recognizing that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
mode notification means capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
An advantageous state in which a transition to a specific state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state a specific increase/decrease number calculation means for calculating
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculation means;
When the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means corresponds to establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the mode notification means causes a change in notification information for performing the state notification. a specific process executing means for executing a specific process for
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table and an addition game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows a process for pushing down. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing MY update processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. (a) is a flowchart showing a specific replay navigation mode lottery process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a navigation mode table. It is a flow chart which shows specific replay navi lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific replay navi lottery table. 4 is a flowchart showing navigation mode processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect; It is a flowchart which shows the process for MY high probability. 10 is a flowchart showing acquisition processing of an additional lottery table; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the target result of the MY high probability mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a flowchart showing bell notification processing; 4 is a flowchart showing bell notification adjustment processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display effect by the auxiliary display unit, the pressing order notification on the instruction monitor, and the game result; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display effect by the auxiliary display unit, the pressing order notification on the instruction monitor, and the game result; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between MY high-probability mode and navigation mode; In Modified Example 1, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given, and (b) to (d) are diagrams showing examples of lottery tables for various states. 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the specific number set in the MY high probability mode in modification 2; It is a figure for demonstrating the specific number set to MY high probability mode. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing a mode setting process at the start of an advantageous section in modification 3, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of each mode table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability of winning a specific replay navigation lottery and the MY counter in modification 4; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing part of the winning result handling process in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd process for MY high probability. It is a figure which shows the relationship between each specific number, an additional winning rate, and the additional number of games. 4 is a flowchart showing SMY command handling processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 10 is a flowchart showing mode setting processing at the start of an advantageous section in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between each specific number, additional winning rate, and additional game count in each mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for mode lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 10 is a flowchart showing SMY command handling processing in modification 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 14 is a flowchart showing SMY command handling processing in modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a result combination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 14 is a flowchart showing SMY command handling processing in Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd process for MY high probability in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between each specific number, a game result, an additional winning rate, and an additional number of games. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second process for MY high probability in a modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific MY add-on processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between each specific number, a lottery result, an additional winning rate, and an additional number of games. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing part of the number-of-games management process in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between AT mode Renso and a specific number; FIG.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, the first BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the first BB state. Further, when the "white BAR" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the activated line, the second BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the second BB state. "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols, and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning a prize, there is a stop roll that shifts to the first RT state when the game is stopped on condition that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S214 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S210, reel control processing in step S211, medal payout processing in step S212, RT state processing in step S213, and bonus state processing in step S214 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 58) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=35 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/37.4, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/18.7. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/2.14.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1 BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the seventh minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 has reached the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning, if the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins will win. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the ninth minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the second minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. One of the case where winning is established, the case where the ninth minor winning combination is established, and the case where the transition rolls are stopped and none of the minor winning combinations are established and the game is lost.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. In this case, nine medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the first minor combination in the 3-bet game.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the operation timing, a small winning combination may be established, or the transitional number may stop on the effective line, resulting in a loss. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S213 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. When it is determined in step S502 that the game state in which the transition roll is stopped is not the normal game state, the RT state is terminated as it is. In this case, even if the transition roll is stopped, the transition of the game state does not occur.

If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 2.14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike when winning the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning or The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/26.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/32.8, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/18.2. The probability of not winning any role is about 1/2.74. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

In addition, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the first re-game winning, or in the operation order corresponding to the fifth re-game winning and the first re-game winning When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, basically stop control is performed so as to establish the fourth re-game winning prize and the fifth re-game winning prize. Stop control is performed so as to establish the first regame winning when the winning cannot be established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process. Further, when it is determined in step S509 that neither the fourth re-game winning nor the fifth re-game winning has been established, this processing is terminated as it is.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24) in the point values PV for IV=1, 6 to 14, and the same point values are used for the other index values IV. A value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1 is about 1/11.0, and winning at IV=6 to 8 is about 1/11.0. The probabilities are about 1/15.4, respectively, and the probability of not winning when IV=9 and 10, and the probability of winning when IV=11 and 12 is about 1/19.5. Also, in the 3rd RT state, it is possible to win specific replay 1 and specific replay 2 with IV = 14 and 15, and the probability of winning at IV = 14 and 15 is about 1/20.0. be. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 140. That is, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the odds of losing are lower than in the normal game state, the 1st RT state, and the 2nd RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, when the state is shifted to the 3rd RT state, the prize mode in which the replay privilege is awarded changes to a state different from that in the 2nd RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, A 7th regame win, an 8th regame win, a 3rd regame win that shifts to the 2nd RT state, an 11th regame win as a cherry replay, and a 12th regame win as a watermelon play are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when winning BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2, specific replay 1, or specific replay 2, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Stop information is set to change the winning mode established by.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning, the seventh replay winning and the eighth replay winning is established without fail. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning, the sixth replay winning and the eighth replay winning is established without fail.

FIG. 23(d) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When the specific replay 1 and the specific replay 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 1st replay winning prize, the 11th replay winning prize, and the 12th replay winning prize in any of the specific replays. One of the winning prizes is guaranteed. In the present embodiment, the third replay winning, in which the winning flag is set when the specific replay 2 is won, is not associated with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the specific replay 2 winning is performed. In this case, the third replay win is not established regardless of the operation order. More specifically, when the specific replay 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 11th replay prize, which is a cherry replay, is established, and the middle stop is established. When the switch 43 is operated first, the twelfth regame winning, which is the watermelon play, is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the first regame winning is established. On the other hand, when the specific replay 2 is won, the operation order associated with the 11th replay winning and the 12th replay winning is opposite to that of the specific replay 1, and the left stop switch 42 is The 12th re-game win is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the 11th re-game win is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the right stop switch 44 is operated first. , the first replay win is established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence relationship between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination is awarded. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st small win, 27th minor win, 31st minor win, 36th to 38th minor win wins are established, 15 medals will be awarded. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning to the 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning to the 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning to the 35th minor role winning are established, 14 pieces Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be executed as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 collectively shows the lottery table for the 1BB state selected in the 1BB state to which the 1BB prize is won and the lottery table for the 2BB state selected in the 2BB state to which the 2BB prize is won. . In the first BB state lottery table and the second BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV=1-14, 22-30, and 34-58. Therefore, in either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, winning is not possible with IV=1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58. Also, in the lottery table for the 1BB state and the lottery table for the 2BB state, the point values of IV=19 to 21 and 31 to 33 are set in common in both lottery tables, and the 1BB state and the 2BB state are set. In any of the states, the probability of winning Chance A with IV=19 is about 1/65.5, the probability of winning Chance B with IV=20 is about 1/65.5, and the probability of winning Chance B with IV=21 is about 1/65.5. The probability of winning the middle bell is about 1/1310, the probability of winning the 1st role in IV=31 BB is about 1/2.12, the probability of winning the 2nd role in IV=32 BB is about 1/1310. About 1 in 13.1, the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB with IV=33 is about 1 in 13.1.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, different point values are set for IV=15 to 18, and the probability of winning the strong cherry with IV=15 is the same as in the first BB state. In the second BB state, it is about 1/93.6, and it is easier to win a strong cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=16 is about 1/6.56 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/26.2 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak cherry than in the second BB state.

The probability of winning a strong watermelon with IV=17 is about 1/93.6 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/21.8 in the 2nd BB state, and the 2nd BB state is higher. It is easier to win a strong watermelon than in the 1BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=18 is about 1/26.2 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/6.56 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak watermelon than in the first BB state.

That is, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the winning probability of the lottery result of so-called rare combination such as strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc. is higher than other states such as the normal game state and the first RT state to the third RT state. Comparing the first BB state and the second BB state, it is easier to win strong cherries or weak cherries in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and in the second BB state it is easier to win strong watermelons or weak watermelons than in the first BB state. It is designed to make it easier.

In addition, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, etc., win prizes depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if they are operated at timings that do not correspond to prize wins, they will not win prizes and will be lost.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. On the other hand, for the 2nd BB win and the 3rd BB win, the 1st minor win is associated with 4 of the 6 operating orders, and the 2nd minor win is associated with the 2 operating orders. The 40th minor winning combination and the 41st minor winning combination are associated with each other. In other words, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first minor winning combination, the 2nd winning winning combination or the 3rd winning winning winning combination during the BB wins the 1st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination. If it matches the 41st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning combination. In the 3-bet game in the BB state, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, and 3 medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. In other words, when the 1st win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win is established regardless of the order of operations, and 9 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd win in the BB is won, depending on the order of operations. When the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out. Then, when the 3rd win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win or the 41st minor win is established depending on the order of operation, and when the 1st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out. , three medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. That is, for the 3rd winning combination in the BB, the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (Fig. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the corresponding bonuses are determined. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect a maximum increase of 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

As described above, if a strong cherry, strong watermelon, or the like is won in the BB state, winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the winning is not established, medals will not be paid out in the game. does not occur. Also, when winning the 3rd combination in BB, 9 or 3 medals are paid out depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. That is, in the BB state, the upper limit of the number of payouts is set (216), and if 9 coins are paid out every game, a maximum increase of 144 medals can be expected as described above, and the BB state ends after 24 games. However, depending on the lottery result of each game in the BB state and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game, the number of tokens to be increased when the upper limit number of payouts is reached may be less than the maximum number. , is set so that the number of games until reaching the upper limit payout number can be increased.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the state does not shift from the normal game state to the second RT state to the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery processing using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, since the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state. Further, in the first RT state, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which each 1BB win flag is set, the game state shifts to the BB state. In the 1RT state, even if a drop occurs in a game in which the pressing order bell is won and the number for transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. Further, when the second re-game winning is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state. In the second RT state, even if there is a failure in the game in which the winning order of the bell is won and the number for transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, when the second regame winning is established, the game state shifts to the 1st RT state. The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. In the 3rd RT state, even if a drop occurs in a game in which the winning order bell is won, and the number for transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), and BB mode are managed by the main controller 101 .

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of 144 medals at maximum.

When the normal mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the BB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the BB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Specific replay 1, specific replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to CZ mode or AT mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to CZ mode or AT mode is won, the normal mode shifts to CZ mode or AT mode. When shifting to the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the pressing order bell is won or when the pressing order replay is won.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.92 each time one game is played, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state. In some cases, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by approximately 0.61 each time one game is played, and if the gaming state at that time is the third RT state, the number of medals will increase by approximately 0.45 each time one game is played. can be expected.

The CZ mode is a so-called chance zone mode in which the probability of winning a lottery to switch to the AT mode is higher than in the normal mode. The CZ mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. The expected increase/decrease in medals per game in the CZ mode is the same as in the above normal mode, and in the normal game state or the first RT state, the medals decrease by about 0.92 each time one game is played. If the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and if the game state at that time is the 3rd RT state, It can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.45 each time one game is played. In the CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified when the push order bell wins or when the push order replay wins. It is preferable to set the frequency of notification of the operation sequence, such as probability, to be lower in the CZ mode than in the AT mode. As a configuration for notifying the operation order in the CZ mode, for example, while the operation order is notified a predetermined number of times (once) when the pressing order bell is won during the stay, the operation when the pressing order bell is won after that A configuration may be adopted in which the order is not notified.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The AT mode is a mode that starts with the initial number of games set to a predetermined number (for example, 50). is played, the AT mode is switched to the normal mode.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state, and mainly corresponds to the third RT state. More specifically, in the AT mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported even when the press order replay is won, so that a transition from the first RT state to the second RT state and from the second RT state to the third RT state occurs. , stays in the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state and the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.52 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state. In some cases, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by approximately 0.82 each time one game is played, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state, the number of medals will increase by approximately 1.90 each time one game is played. can be expected. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

Regarding the shift of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, it is common to shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. may or may not pass through the CZ mode.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode and the BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated according to the winning of each replay or the stoppage of transitional results. As described above, depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay wins or the push order bell wins, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation sequence that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is reported, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the press order bell and the press order replay win are announced as described above, and when the display mode is the normal mode or the CZ mode, these presses are notified. There is no notification of the order of operation when winning the order bell or the push order replay. Therefore, the AT mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode and the CZ mode in terms of whether or not there is notification of the push order bell and the operation order at the time of winning the push order replay. From the viewpoint of easiness of shifting to the AT mode, the CZ mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode. In other words, the AT mode is included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of small wins and the like by notifying the order of operations. The CZ mode, in which the transition rate to the mode is high, is also included in the advantageous section. In this slot machine 10, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode is performed by shifting to an advantageous section, and a shift to the AT mode can occur. It is configured so that no transition to

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, it grasps whether it is in the CB state or other states (normal game state, each RT state, first BB state, second BB state). As already explained, in the CB state, 2 is set as the prescribed number of bets, and in other states, 1 or 3 is prescribed as the prescribed number of bets. Then, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state grasped in step S701. More specifically, in the CB state, the prescribed number of bets is only 2, so the determination in step S702 is always affirmative. Except for the CB state, the prescribed numbers of bets are 1 and 3 as described above. In this embodiment, 3 is set as the specific prescribed number for states other than the CB state. If the number of bets is 3, an affirmative determination is made in step S702. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S703 is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 1 in a state other than the CB state, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. In this case, the processing for the display mode after step S703 is not performed. Therefore, for example, when winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and attempting to achieve the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning in a 1-bet game, the processing for the display mode is not performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not an advantageous interval flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 to determine whether the current game is an advantageous interval. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section including the AT mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S704 to execute the advantageous section transition lottery process, and then terminates the lottery result handling process.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) differs according to the lottery result of each game. All possible winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S804, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition is won. If not, the lottery processing ends as it is. If the transfer lottery has been won, in step S806, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. By this processing, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S703 of the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 31) for the next game and thereafter. In the subsequent step S807, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. After executing the process of step S807, this advantageous zone transition lottery process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S703 that the advantageous zone flag is set in the lottery result handling process, that is, if the lottery to move to the advantageous zone has been won before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode, is set when shifting to the AT mode, and is cleared when the AT mode finally ends. . When a negative determination is made in step S705, AT lottery processing is executed in step S706. When an affirmative determination is made in step S705, AT addition processing is executed in step S707.

<AT lottery process>
The AT lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, a transition lottery is mainly performed to determine whether to shift the display mode to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify whether or not the current display mode is the CZ mode, is set upon transition to the CZ mode, and is cleared upon termination of the CZ mode. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S903, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal mode is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and if the CZ mode flag is set, in step S904. , an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ mode is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 .

In these AT mode transition lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 35, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination). For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal mode, it is generally easier to win the AT mode transition lottery with a strong cherry than with a weak cherry. It is set so that the lower the result, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, regarding normal replays and chance A, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and the setting value that is set so that the ball output rate increases (setting The higher the value, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. Comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, even if the lottery results are the same, the CZ lottery is set to be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal one. For example, the AT mode winning rate at chance A in the CZ mode is double the AT mode winning rate at chance A in the normal mode.

Note that the game result and the winning probability that trigger the AT mode transition lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, the type of game result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different between the normal mode and the CZ mode, so that the superiority of the CZ mode may be secured. In this case, the game that triggers the AT mode transition lottery It is better to have more types of results for the CZ mode. Furthermore, in this case, the winning probability itself of the AT mode shift lottery may be the same between the normal mode and the CZ mode. In each CZ mode, multiple CZ modes are provided, and in one CZ mode, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery at chance A, and in other CZ modes, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery at chance B. A different AT mode transition lottery table may be set.

In step S905, an AT mode transition lottery is executed using the lottery result of the current game ascertained in step S901 and the AT mode transition lottery table acquired in step S903 or step S904. In the AT mode transition lottery as well, random numbers (counters) for lottery are obtained from various counter areas 106e, and the lottery is performed using the random numbers in the same manner as in the advantageous zone transition lottery. The configuration for such a lottery is the same for the following other lotteries, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not a lottery for switching to the AT mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the AT mode is won, in step S907, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag is executed. Thereafter, in steps S908 to S910, processing for setting the portent mode is performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a situation arises in which a transition to the AT mode may occur, the portent mode is set to suggest such a situation. In the omen mode, an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won is displayed on the auxiliary display part 65, the speaker 64, etc., and when the number of games in the omen mode becomes 0, the shift to the AT mode is allowed, and a message to that effect is displayed. A notification effect (AT mode winning notification effect) is performed.

In step S908, a process of determining the number of games in the portent mode (the number of portent games) by lottery is performed. As the number of precursor games, for example, 0 to 32 games are set, and which number of precursor games is likely to be selected differs depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the AT mode. For example, if the AT mode is won with strong cherries, the premonition mode of games 0 to 10 is likely to be selected, and if the AT mode is won with weak cherries, games 7 to 14 are likely to be selected. , is set.

In step S909, a process of inputting the number of precursor games determined by the lottery in step S908 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the portent mode. Then, in step S910, a portent flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and a portent command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. After that, the AT lottery processing ends. The portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the portent mode is set, and the portent command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the portent mode has been set. . The omen command includes information on the number of games in the omen mode.

If it is determined in step S906 that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S912. In the CZ mode transition lottery, a CZ mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 35) is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e to determine whether or not to shift to the CZ mode. hold a lottery. In the present embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery. , and the winning probability is not limited to that shown in FIG.

Then, in step S913, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and if the lottery is won, a CZ mode flag is set in step S914, and a CZ counter provided in various counter areas 106e. is set to 10 as a predetermined value, and a CZ start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . By setting the CZ mode flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S902, and it is possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery with an advantageous lottery table. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. When the CZ counter reaches 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared and the CZ mode ends. The CZ start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the CZ mode will start, and the display control device 81 that receives the CZ start command assists so that an effect for starting the CZ mode is performed. The display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that effects during the CZ mode are performed in each game during the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is set in step S911, if the CZ mode transition lottery is not won in step S913, or after executing the process of step S914, in any of the cases, the process proceeds to step S915. move on. In step S915, it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, although the same or similar suggestive effect as in the omen mode is generated, the effect mode ends without performing the AT mode winning notification effect that the transition to the AT mode is finally permitted. A pseudo portent mode (a mode in which a so-called fake effect is generated) is set, and the pseudo portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize the pseudo portent mode. If the pseudo portent flag is not set, in step S916, it is decided by lottery whether or not to set the pseudo portent mode, and the number of games in the pseudo portent mode if set. With regard to such a lottery, for example, the less likely it is to be won (lower appearance rate) as a result of the game lottery, the more likely it is to win the lottery for transition to the pseudo omen mode, and the more likely it is to be won (higher appearance rate) as a game lottery result. ) If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is won as a result, the pseudo-prediction mode with a relatively long number of games may be set. Then, in step S917, a process of inputting the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode determined in step S916 to the pseudo precursor counter is executed. If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is not won, the process of step S917 is not performed (0 is input to the pseudo-prediction counter). After that, in step S918, a pseudo precursor flag is set, and a pseudo precursor command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. After that, the AT lottery process ends. The pseudo portent command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the pseudo portent mode has been set, and includes information on the number of games remaining in the pseudo portent mode. Depending on the number of remaining games, a lottery for generating a suggestive effect is performed. If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is not won in step S916, the AT lottery process may be terminated without performing the process of step S918.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process that is executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and the continuation of the AT mode that is started with the predetermined number of games as the initial number of continuous games. This is a process for adding the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is an additional lottery result. Here, in this embodiment, when adding the number of games in the AT mode, the lottery result of the game is the result of the lottery addition lottery in which the lottery is added according to the lottery result of the role, and the result of the lottery of the role. As part of the results to be notified of the order, an addition result at the time of notification for performing an additional lottery depending on the presence or absence of a predetermined notification of the order of pushing is set. More specifically, in the present embodiment, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2, specific replay 1, and specific replay 2 are set as the additional results at the time of notification. In this case, an additional lottery is performed when the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh replay is performed, and when the specific replay 1 or the specific replay 2 is won, the 11th replay or the 12th replay is performed. An additional lottery is performed when the push order notification is performed.

In step S1002, a negative determination is made in the case of a lottery add-on result instead of the notification add-on result, and the add-on process from step S1003 onwards is performed. In step S1003, an additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 36, the additional lottery table in this embodiment includes a normal table and a MY high probability table. The processing for acquiring the additional lottery table will be described in detail later, but here, in order to explain the basic flow of the additional lottery table, the description will first be given using the normal table that is mainly acquired. As shown in FIG. 36, the normal table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery and the number of games to be added to the winning lottery are different depending on the type of the lottery result. For example, in strong cherry, 20 to 200 games are added in the AT mode, and the average number of games added is 40 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In subsequent step S1004, an additional lottery is executed using the additional lottery table acquired in step S1005 and the lottery counters in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S1005, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the addition has not been won, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, in step S1006, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in various counter areas 106e of RAM 106) is set to step S1006. A process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in S1006 is performed. In the following step S1007, the addition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to post-notify the winning of the addition lottery and the number of games in the addition lottery.

In this slot machine 10, a plurality of modes are set for addition notification when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. When doing (also referred to as "immediate notification" in the following description), and when performing an additional notification in a notification game that is a game after the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (hereinafter (Also referred to as "post-loading notification") is set.

In the immediate addition notification, the series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurred refers to, for example, the case where the game in which the addition occurred triggers a continuous effect, etc., and from the game in which the addition occurred A game that can be continued over a plurality of games is called a series of games. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG in the figure), and the post-boarding notification is for the AT mode, etc. The number of remaining games is notified later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-loading counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-add notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG).

In the above step S1007, for example, based on the game result that triggered the current addition winning and the current addition counter BG, the current addition is notified by immediate addition notification or by subsequent addition notification. decide whether to For example, if the game result that triggered the addition winning this time is a result that makes it difficult to win the addition lottery, the addition notification is likely to be selected, and the unexpectedness of the addition notification can be enhanced. Further, if the lower the current post-boarding counter BG, the more easily the post-boarding notification is selected, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of the post-boarding notification being performed.

After executing the add-on lottery process in step S1007, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery is won in step S1008. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1009, processing is performed to add the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. , temporarily stores the number of added games this time in a register or the like. Then, in step S1010, a notification timing setting process is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game.

In one game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set to differ according to the number of addition games. In the present embodiment, assuming that the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel in the order of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the first reel is stopped, The stop operation of the second reel and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the notification timing setting process of step S1010, the notification timing is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur when the stop OFF operation is performed than when the stop ON operation is performed for each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the second reel stop operation is the second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation. In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1011, an add-on command including information that an add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, information that an immediate add-on has been selected, and information on the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game is sent to the display control device 81. is set as an output target for AT, the AT addition processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command sets the add-on notification effect based on these pieces of information.

If it is determined in step S1008 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1013, a process of setting a post-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed, and then, in step S1014, the information of the occurrence of the addition, the number of additional games, and the post-addition notification are selected. After setting the add-on command including the information to be output to the display control device 81, the AT add-on process is terminated.

In step S1002, if the lottery result of the current game is not a lottery add-on result but an announcing add-on result and is BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2, specific replay 1, or specific replay 2, the process proceeds to step S1015. The processing from step S1015 to step S1021 is processing related to the winning probability of the push order notification in the additional result at the time of notification, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After executing the process of step S706 or step S707, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the result of the lottery process this time is a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S709, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT notification flag is set at the stage when it is allowed to cause the transition to the AT mode after winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode (at the stage when the number of precursor games becomes 0 and the AT mode winning notification is performed). Flags to be set. When the notification flag for AT is set, the processing for the pushing order is executed in step S710, and then the lottery result correspondence processing is ended. If it is determined that the first prize is not won in step S708, or if the AT notification flag is not set in step S709, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Prior to the description of the process for the pressing order, the outline of the notification of the operation order (pressing order notification, pressing order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) at the time of winning the pressing order will be described. Notification of the operation order is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 .

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 38(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 38(b), by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be obtained. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a transition to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which an AT mode winning notification is performed and an AT notification flag is set, etc. is established, the light is lit in the game in which the start condition is established. Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (AT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the transition to the navigation state lottery Chance state (CZ mode, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win, or transition to navigation state or chance state Including winning state (winning mode) that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to these navigation states or chance states The section is an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the specific section in which the benefits of pushing order notification can be obtained in the advantageous section, and is not an advantageous section. It constitutes a section display (specific notification means) that is turned off during a section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Processing for push-up>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 40, the pushing order processing executed in step S710 will be described.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1101 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1102, and control is performed so that the command monitor 68 performs the pressing order notification for the third replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1103, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1102, the operation sequence corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, basically, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like. By winning ~ 4, it is possible to return to the 3rd RT state early.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1104 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1105, the command monitor 68 is controlled to perform the pressing order notification for the first replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1106, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S709, the push order process is not performed, so that the push order notification does not occur. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S709, the push order notification does not occur. Winning 3 may establish a second replay prize, and the RT state will shift from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay winning, and the 3rd replay winning is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of shifting to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1107 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1108, as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side, the command monitor 68 is controlled to perform the pressing order notification for the fourth replay or the fifth replay. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1109, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1110 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1110 means that any one of the first re-game and the sixth to eighth re-games wins according to the operation order of the current game. As described above, with respect to the addition result at the time of notification including the BAR replays 1 and 2, the addition lottery is not performed in the AT addition process. Therefore, in the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to perform the pushing order notification effect for the seventh re-game winning, which is the target of the additional lottery, and then the pushing order for the seventh re-game winning. A process for AT addition is performed when the notification effect is performed.

That is, when the determination in step S1110 is affirmative, in step S1111, a BAR matching lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to notify that the winning of the seventh replay as a BAR replay is to be established. The winning probability of the BAR matching lottery is, for example, about 1/1000, and is set to a relatively low probability. It should be noted that the set value may be set so that the winning probability of the BAR matching lottery differs.

In step S1112, it is determined whether or not the lottery with all the BARs has been won. If not, the process proceeds to step S1105, and control is performed so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order for the first regame as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. After that, in step S1106, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1112 that the BAR matching lottery has been won, in step S1113 a process of adding the number of additional games to the AT mode continuation counter is executed. Here, when winning the BAR matching lottery in step S1111, the winning lottery has a probability of 100% as defined in the extra lottery table (normal table) in FIG. Therefore, after winning the BAR matching lottery, the additional lottery is omitted. In addition, the number of games to be added in the case of winning the lottery with all BARs is set to 50 games as one predetermined number of games. That is, in step S1113, a process of adding 50 to the AT mode continuation counter is executed.

In the subsequent step S1114, the number of additional games (50) is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the number of additional games is temporarily stored in a register. Then, in step S1115, notification timing setting processing is performed. In this process, in the present embodiment, the notification timing is set so that the additional notification is performed at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the game in which the BAR alignment occurs this time. Then, in step S1116, a process of outputting the add command to the display control device 81 is executed.

In the subsequent step S1117, as the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to perform the pressing order notification for the first replay. After that, in step S1118, after a specific pressing order notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the actual pressing order process is terminated. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the specific pressing order notification command will be described in detail later. The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that a different (non-corresponding pressing order) pressing order notification effect is performed, and in the case of the specific pressing order notification command in step S1118, the pressing order notification effect for the seventh re-game is assisted. This is done on the display unit 65 .

In other words, even in a situation where the BAR matching lottery is won as described above and the 7th re-game winning prize is won, the instruction monitor 68 indicates the 1st re-game pushing order as the pushing order notification. Notification is performed, and the display control device 81 side performs a pushing order notification effect corresponding to the seventh regame winning. Among push-up roles with different winning results depending on the order of operations, as in the above promotion replays and falling replays, depending on the winning result, the game state may or may not change. It can be said that the profit of the player differs depending on the pressing order. On the other hand, with respect to BAR replays 1 and 2, even if any one of the first replay and the sixth to eighth replays wins, the game state does not change, and replays are awarded in both cases. The player's profit does not differ depending on the pushing order. Therefore, for the items with different interests of the player, different pressing order notifications are performed as the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side, while for the items with the same benefits for the player, the main control device 101 side pressing order notification is performed. As for the order notification, common pressing order notification is performed. By doing so, the processing load is reduced.

If a negative determination is made in step S1110, it is determined in step S1119 whether or not the current lottery result is either specific replay 1 or 2. Affirmative determination in step S1119 means that any one of the first, eleventh, and twelfth replays is won according to the operation order of the current game. As described above, the specific replays 1 and 2 are also the result of addition at the time of notification as with the BAR replays 1 and 2, and the addition lottery is not performed in the AT addition process. Therefore, in the case of the specific replays 1 and 2, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not to perform a pushing order notification effect for the 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize, which are targets of the additional lottery, and then the 11th replay. When a re-game winning prize or a twelfth re-game winning prize push order notification performance is performed, a process for adding AT is performed.

That is, if the determination in step S1119 is affirmative, in step S1120, it is determined whether or not to make it possible to achieve the winning of the 11th regame as a cherry replay or the 12th regame as a watermelon replay. A specific replay navi lottery process is executed. Details of the specific replay navigation lottery process will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of the pressing order notification effect for cherry replay or watermelon play differs depending on the game state. In addition, when the specific replays 1 and 2 are won, both the 11th replay as the cherry replay and the 12th regame as the watermelon replay are won in any of the specific replays 1 and 2. In the navi lottery process, it is determined by lottery which of the cherry replay and the watermelon play is to be announced as winning.

In step S1121, it is determined whether or not the specific replay navigation lottery process in step S1120 is won. If not, the process advances to step S1105, and control is performed so that the instruction monitor 68 performs the pressing order notification for the first replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. After that, in step S1106, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1121 that the specific replay navigation lottery has been won, then in steps S1122 and S1123 an additional lottery for winning the specific replay navigation is performed, and then steps S1124 to S1128 are added to the process. , steps S1129 and S1130 for notifying the pressing order are performed.

In other words, in step S1122, an additional lottery table acquisition process is executed. This processing is the same as the processing of step S1003 in the above-mentioned AT addition processing, and here, the case where the normal table is acquired among the addition lottery tables shown in FIG. 36 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the normal table, the odds of winning in the additional lottery when winning notification for cherry replay or watermelon play in specific replays 1 and 2 are as follows: It is different from the case of winning the notification. More specifically, if you win the notification for watermelon play than if you win the notification for cherry replay, the probability of winning additional winnings is higher, and the average number of additional games at the time of winning is set to increase. It is Also, unlike the above BAR replays 1 and 2, even if you win the notification for cherry replay or the notification for watermelon play, you may not win the extra lottery. Even if the winning of the replay is established, no addition will occur.

In step S1123, an additional lottery is performed using the additional lottery table acquired in step S1122 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S1124, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won, and if it has been won, in step S1125, a process of adding the number of additional games to the AT mode continuation counter is executed.

In the subsequent step S1126, the number of additional games (50) is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the number of additional games is temporarily stored in a register. Then, in step S1127, notification timing setting processing is performed. In this process, in the present embodiment, the notification timing is set so that the additional notification is performed at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the game in which the current cherry replay or watermelon play win is established. Then, in step S1128, a process of outputting the add command to the display control device 81 is executed.

If it is determined in step S1124 that the additional lottery has not been won, or if the process of step S1128 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1129. In step S1129, as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side, control is performed so that the pressing order notification for the first replay is performed on the instruction monitor 68. FIG. After that, in step S1130, after the specific pressing order notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the actual pressing order process is terminated. As described above, when the specific pressing order notification command is received, the display control device 81 displays an auxiliary display so that a pressing order notification effect different from the pressing order notification on the main control unit 101 side (not corresponding to the pressing order) is performed. By controlling the unit 65 and the like, in the case of the specific pressing order notification command in step S1130, the pressing order notification effect for the 11th re-game and the pressing order notification effect for the 12th re-game are performed on the auxiliary display unit 65. become.

If a negative determination is made in step S1119, it is determined in step S1131 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the bell is won in the pressing order, the process advances to step S1132 to determine whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1131 or step S1132, the process for the pushing order is terminated. That is, even if the AT notification flag is set, if the AT mode flag is not set and the state is in preparation before shifting to the AT mode, the push order at the time of winning the push order bell No notification is made. If the AT mode flag is set in step S1132, the bell notification process is executed in step S1133, and then the actual pressing order notification process is terminated. The details of the bell notification process will be described later, but in this process, basically, the instruction monitor 68 on the main controller 101 side performs notification of the pressing order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination. At the same time, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 of the display control device 81 (FIG. 19).

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1201, game number management processing is executed. The number-of-games management process is a process for managing the number of continuous games such as AT mode, CZ mode, and sign mode.

That is, in the game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in steps S1301 and S1302, the same processes as steps S701 and S702 are performed. That is, in step S1301, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, it grasps whether it is in the CB state or other states (normal game state, each RT state, first BB state, second BB state). Then, in step S1302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state ascertained in step S1301. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, processing for the display mode is performed from step S1303 onward. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the number-of-games management process ends. In this case, the processing for the display mode after step S1303 is not performed.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and the current game is in the carryover state before shifting to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. If it is in the carryover state, the CZ mode flag and the AT mode flag are erased in step S1304, and then the number-of-games management process ends. In this case, the CZ mode and AT mode are terminated. However, in the AT mode, after the BB state ends, a transition to the third RT state occurs quickly due to notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order replay. In this case, after the BB state ends, the counting of the number of games in the AT mode is resumed after the transition to the third RT state occurs.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are not set, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1306. Then, in step S1307, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1308, and a CZ mode end command is sent to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the output target. By clearing the CZ mode flag, the CZ mode ends and the normal mode is entered. In addition, the display control device 81, which has received the CZ mode end command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the end of the CZ mode is notified (for example, a character display such as "I'm sorry" and its sound effect). and the speaker 64 are controlled.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1305 or step S1307, or if the process of step S1308 has been executed, the process advances to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag or pseudo precursor flag is set. If none of the flags is set, the game number management process is terminated. If any flag is set, the process advances to step S1310 to execute a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter or the pseudo precursor counter. That is, in step S1310, the precursor counter is decremented by 1 in the precursor mode, and the pseudo precursor counter is decremented by 1 in the pseudo precursor mode.

After executing the process of step S1310, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set and the precursor counter has become 0 in step S1311. That is, when the number of portent games is 0 in the portent mode, the process advances to step S1312 to perform processing for clearing the portent flag. Then, in step S1313, a process of setting an AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. As described above, by setting the AT notification flag, it is possible to shift the RT state to a higher RT state when winning the push order replay, and prevent the shift to a lower RT state. It becomes possible. Incidentally, in step S1304, the AT notification flag is not cleared even in the AT mode. Therefore, after the BB state ends, when the pushing order replay is won, the pushing order notification is generated, and it is possible to shift to the third RT state.

After executing the process of step S1313, the process of setting the AT mode winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1314. In the display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command, the auxiliary display unit performs an AT mode winning notification effect that the AT mode transition lottery is won and the transition to the AT mode is permitted. 65 and speaker 64 are controlled. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Super lucky!!"

In step S1311, if the precursor counter is not 0, or if it is 0 but the pseudo precursor flag is set instead of the precursor flag, the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor counter is 0 and the pseudo precursor flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1315, the process of clearing the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S1316, and then the number-of-games management process ends. This will end the pseudo-precursor mode.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1309 or step S1315, or if either step S1314 or step S1316 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S1318, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented. Then, in step S1319, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step S1320, processing for erasing the AT mode flag and the AT notification flag is performed. Thereafter, in step S1321, a process of setting an AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not the state in which the AT mode is not in the advantageous section is the state after the transition to the AT mode occurs.

In step S1322, processing for setting the AT mode end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode end command, performs an AT mode end notification effect to indicate that the AT mode has ended (for example, a character display such as "END", a display of the number of medals won during the AT mode, a continuation game in the AT mode, etc.). The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display of the number and the sound effect thereof are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1317 or step S1319, or if the process of step S1322 has been executed, the navigation mode process is executed in step S1323, and then the number of games management process ends. The navigation mode processing will be described later in detail.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result handling process, after the process of step S1201 is executed, the process for adding notification is executed in step S1202. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the above-mentioned post-addition notification. , the addition notification (post-addition notification) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the establishment of the fourth regame winning prize or the fifth regame winning prize. As described above, when the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established without the conditions for shifting to the AT mode being established. The process for dealing with winning results is terminated without performing any processing. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode.

At step S1205, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already AT mode, so the process for dealing with winning results is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1206 to S1208.

That is, in step S1206, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1207, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. After that, in step S1208, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, on condition that the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode is set. After executing the process of step S1208, the winning result handling process ends. In step S1208, when the AT mode continuation counter is not 0, for example, when the AT mode is resumed after the BB state, the AT mode continuation counter is taken over as it is and the measurement is performed. resume.

As described above, in particular, the display mode is shifted separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the game state to the third RT state as the main state of the AT mode. process to make it work. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted to a higher mode among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, that is, when shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. and Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state transitions due to the stoppage of the second regame winning as a fall replay, the transition of the display mode is not performed. When shifting to such a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (process for RT state), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Section display first process>
Next, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. . As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit means that the specific section, among the advantageous sections, satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1401 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 32) when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. If the advantageous section flag has been set, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1404. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed in step S1406. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and the process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

If it is determined in step S1405 that measurement has already started, or if the process of step S1406 has been executed, the process advances to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, the pushing order notification when the pushing winning role is won becomes possible, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1408 the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section display. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound of "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1409 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step S1409, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the advantageous section flag is not set, or if the game is a winning game even if the advantageous section flag is set (after executing the process of step S1404), the winning game Even if not, if the situation does not allow the pressing order notification to occur (if it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1408 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1410 or step S1411, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1412. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1413, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1412 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1413, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1412 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1413, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1412. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1502, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1502, in step S1503, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Advantageous interval increase/decrease number MY is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S1503, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, in the MY update process in step S1503, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is any replay win. In the case of any replay winning prize, the MY update process is terminated without updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY. If there is no replay win, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, a process of subtracting the number of inserted coins (number of bets) from the number of payouts is executed based on the game result of the current game. Step S1602 is a process for grasping the number of increased medals and the number of decreased medals by subtracting the medals used in the game from the medals obtained. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the first minor winning combination is established, 3 coins are bet and 9 medals are paid out, resulting in an increase of 6 medals. Also, when the second minor win is established in the 3-bet game, 3 coins are bet and 3 medals are paid out, so there is an increase (decrease) of 0 medals. In the 3-bet game, when none of the small wins is established, 3 coins are bet and 0 medals are paid out (because no medals are paid out). A decline is occurring.

In the following step S1603, a process of adding the calculation result of step S1602 to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is performed. For example, if the calculation result of step S1602 indicates that there is an increase of 6 medals, the process of adding 6 to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed, and the calculation result of step S1602 is a decrease of 3 medals. is occurring, a process of subtracting 3 from the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed. Then, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 0 or more. If so, in step S1605, after performing a process of clearing the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY to 0, the MY update process ends. If the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 0 or more and medals are increasing in the advantageous section, the MY high probability process is executed in step S1606, and then the MY update process ends. The MY high-probability processing will be described later in detail.

In the second section display process, after executing the MY update process in step S1503, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1504, and the remaining game number management process is executed in subsequent step S1505. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is 100 and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1450, even if the AT mode is performed as it is, the end condition of the AT mode ( It is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is reached before the number of AT mode remaining games=0). In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining number management process, for example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is 100 and the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 2300, the AT mode end condition (AT It is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section will be reached before the number of remaining games in the mode = 0). In this case, the expected increase/decrease in the number of medals per game in AT mode, the number of remaining games in AT mode, and the current increase/decrease in the number of advantageous intervals MY may reach the upper limit increase in the above advantageous interval. is high or not. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

By setting these first excess flag and second excess flag, subsequent AT mode additions will not be performed (restricted), or if you win the addition lottery, benefits different from adding the number of games (Suggestion of set values, display of rare images, etc.) will be performed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid meaningless additions in situations where there is a high possibility that the number of remaining games will reach the maximum number of games or the maximum number of increases, and the above situation will be avoided. Even so, it is possible to entertain the game.

After executing the processing of step S1505, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether the number of increase/decrease number of advantageous interval games MY is greater than or equal to 2400 which is the upper limit of increase in the advantageous interval. Determine whether or not. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1507. In the subsequent step S1508, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is performed. Then, in step S1509, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S1509 is a process of resetting the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if an omen flag, a pseudo omen flag, a CZ mode flag, an AT mode winning flag, an AT notification flag, an AT mode flag, etc. are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the counter for the number of continuous games in the omen mode, AT mode, etc. is greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1506 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit, or if it is determined that the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process advances to step S1510 to normally end the advantageous section. Determine whether the conditions are met. More specifically, it is determined whether or not none of the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set and the number of remaining continuous games in the AT mode or the like is zero. If none of these flags have been set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the AT end flag has been set. The AT end flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode ends. If the AT end flag is set, the process advances to step S1507 to perform advantageous section end processing in steps S1507 to S1509, and then end the second section display processing. If a negative determination is made in step S1510 or step S1511, the second section display process is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues. That is, not only during the AT mode, but after the transition to the advantageous section and in a state where the transition to the AT mode has not occurred, the advantageous section does not end. By finishing, the advantageous section ends.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 46, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the game next to the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (advantageous section game counting of number AG) is started. Then, in the advantageous section, when the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, etc., when the push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up assuming that it has been established.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the push order notification in the advantageous section (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the player who finishes the game without knowing that the situation is such that he or she can enjoy the benefits of the pushing order notification and the succeeding player who takes a seat after that. can be made In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order notification does not occur, so the game can be gracefully ended.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. A betting command is a command output from the main controller 101 when a betting operation is performed, and includes a betting command set in step S207 of normal processing. If it is a bet time command, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1704. In the effect setting process at the time of betting, a process for controlling the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed so that an effect based on the current betting operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The start time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the lottery result correspondence There are an omen command, an additional command, a pressing order notification command, a specific pressing order notification command, and the like, which are set in the process. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the processing of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1708, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the process of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, there are an AT mode start command, an AT mode end command, etc., which are set in the winning result handling process. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

When a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the effect setting process at the start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, display mode setting processing is performed. In this processing, it is determined which of the normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, and BB mode the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is, and the auxiliary display section is displayed in the corresponding display mode. It is set so that the display effect of 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area for setting a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, and a BB state mode flag is provided as a flag for grasping the display mode. A corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end. In step S1801, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S1802, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S1803, the pushing order notification process is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the start time command received this time includes a pressing order notification command or a specific pressing order notification command. If any pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If any pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S1903, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform a pushing order notification effect in which the third replay winning prize is established. End the process.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S1905 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform a push order notification effect that establishes the first replay winning prize, and then perform push order notification processing. finish.

If it is determined in step S1904 that the fall replays 1 to 3 are not performed, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, in step S1907, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a push order notification effect in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. End the forward notification process.

If it is determined in step S1706 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1708 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the pressing order notification command received this time is a specific pressing order command. As already explained, when the specific pressing order command is output and set on the main control device 101 side, the content of the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side and the content of the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side are combined. are different. If it is not a specific pressing order notification command, the process advances to step S1905 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to perform a pressing order notification effect that establishes the first regame winning prize, and then terminates the pressing order notification processing. .

If it is determined in step S1909 that it is a specific pressing order notification command, the process advances to step S1910 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like so as to perform a pressing order notification effect that establishes the seventh regame winning prize. End the forward notification process. In this case, in the push order notification on the main control device 101 side, the notification corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed, and in the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, the notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning is performed as an effect. will be

If it is determined in step S1908 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1911 whether or not the current lottery results are specific replays 1 and 2. If it is a specific replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S1712 whether or not the pressing order notification command received this time is a specific pressing order command. If it is not a specific pressing order notification command, the process advances to step S1905 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to perform a pressing order notification effect that establishes the first regame winning prize, and then terminates the pressing order notification processing. .

When it is determined in step S1912 that it is a specific pressing order notification command, the process proceeds to step S1913, and based on the current specific pressing order notification command, the operation order to be notified this time corresponds to the 11th regame winning, which is cherry replay. It is determined whether or not the If it corresponds to the 11th re-game winning, in step S1914, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform a pushing order notification effect in which the 11th re-game winning is established. End the process. In this case, in the push order notification on the main control device 101 side, the notification corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed, and in the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, the notification corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is performed as an effect. will be

If it is determined in step S1913 that the operation order to be notified this time does not correspond to the 11th re-game winning as a cherry replay, but corresponds to the 12th re-game winning as a waterlily play, then in step S1915. , the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a push order notification effect that establishes the 12th regame winning prize, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. In this case, in the push order notification on the main control device 101 side, the notification corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed, and in the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, the notification corresponding to the 12th re-game winning is performed as an effect. will be

If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not specific replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1916 whether or not the lottery result of this time is the pushing order bell. If it is the push order bell, the bell notification adjustment process is executed in step S1917, and then the push order notification process is terminated. In the bell notification adjustment process, basically, on the condition that the pressing order notification command is received, the auxiliary display section performs the pressing order notification effect in which the first small winning combination of 9 coins is paid out. 65 and so on.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 48), if it is determined in step S1802 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. The shift trigger combination is, for example, a so-called rare combination with a low winning probability, such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, strong cherry overlapping 1, 2, weak cherry overlapping 1, 2, etc. , AT mode, bonus state, etc. are expected results. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S1805. In the transition opportunity notification processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 are arranged so as to perform a chance suggestive effect as an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that some kind of advantageous event will occur based on the winning of the transition opportunity role. A process for controlling the speaker 64 or the like is performed, or a process for performing a continuous effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, or after the processing of step S1803 or step S1805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S1807, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S1807 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the subsequent step S2002, processing for grasping the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the processing on the side of the main controller 101, and the determined timing information is set in the above-described addition command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2002, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2002 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2005, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2705, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2004, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is in the stop OFF operation. When these reels are to be stopped and turned OFF, in step S2007, the target reel for which the additional effect is to be generated is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also, in step S2007, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, in step S2008, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2008, temporary storage processing of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007 or step S2008, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S1806, or after the process of step S1807 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S1808, and the process proceeds to step S1809. Then, in step S1810, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The mid-bonus effect setting process is a process for performing the mid-bonus effect in the first BB state or the second BB state on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In the effect during the bonus, for example, the content of each effect is set to be different so that the player can distinguish between the first BB state and the second BB state. Moreover, it is set so that an effect corresponding to the lottery result during the first BB state and the second BB state is performed. Also, the continuous effect setting process is a process for performing a continuous effect in which a series of effects are set over a plurality of games. In the process of step S1810, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned ON is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2104, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the first reel shown in FIG. 39(a) is displayed as the operation target. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 39(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed to be stopped as shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 39(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2105 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed. If the command is not the stop OFF command, the processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process advances to step S2106 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2108, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2202, a process of setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start presentation, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "AT start!". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stopping command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2204, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode ending presentation, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "AT END", displays the number of games to be continued in the current AT mode, and displays the total number of payouts in the current AT mode. do. In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

After either step S2202 or step S2204 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S1807 in the process of setting the effect at the start. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 50), when the timing of occurrence of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2206, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2206, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 41, and each game is started on the main controller 101 side based on the operation of the start lever 41. A lottery will be held. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. medals will be paid out. On the premise of such a configuration, a lottery is further conducted using the lottery result of each game to improve the instruction function of the push order notification such as an advantageous section or a lottery for transition to AT mode. A notification effect is performed by the display control device 81 . When the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, more medals are paid out when the game state transitions or when the bell is won by the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side and the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side. It is possible to establish the first result winning to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a lottery as to whether or not to improve the instruction function (announcement information for notifying the pressing order) is performed based on the lottery result of the game. , AT mode), when a player wins a push-order role, a push-order notification or a push-order notification effect is performed as an indication function. In addition, in a situation where the instruction function is improved, an additional lottery or the like is conducted regarding the continuity of the situation, and if the additional lottery is won, the situation where the instruction function is improved can be continued for a longer time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a configuration for changing the instruction function, there are a plurality of configurations such as a specific replay navigation mode and a MY high probability mode.

<About specific replay navigation mode>
The specific replay navigation mode is a state in which the probability of winning the specific replay navigation lottery when winning the specific replays 1 and 2 is high. Since the corresponding pressing order notification effect is generated, the specific replay navigation mode improves the instruction function corresponding to the 11th regame win and the 12th regame win, so that the 11th replay win and the 12th replay win It can be said that it is a state in which replay winning is likely to be established.

The specific replay navigation mode is entered by winning the specific replay navigation mode lottery process (step S1015) performed in the AT addition process in the lottery result handling process. The specific replay navi mode lottery is executed when the game result of the current game is BAR replays 1 and 2 or specific replays 1 and 2 in the AT addition process (step S1002: YES). The specific replay navi mode lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54(a).

In step S2301, the number of AT mode remaining games is grasped from the AT mode continuation counter, and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of games is greater than a predetermined number (30). It should be noted that the predetermined number determined in step S2301 is a number corresponding to the number of games to be continued in the specific replay navigation mode, and the processing in step S2301 determines whether or not it is possible to shift to the specific replay navigation mode. It can also be called processing.

In the subsequent step S2302, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Note that this process is a process of reading again the lottery result grasped in step S1001. As described above, when this process is activated, the lottery result of the current game is BAR replays 1 and 2 or specific replays 1 and 2. These BAR replays 1 and 2 and specific replays 1 and 2 can be won in the 3rd RT state, but cannot be won in other game states. Therefore, it can be said that the specific replay navigation mode lottery is a process that is activated only in the 3rd RT state.

In the subsequent step S2303, a process of acquiring the navigation mode table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. As shown in FIG. 54(b), the navigation mode table is set so that the winning probability of the navigation mode shift lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game. 1 and 2 are set so that it is easier to win the navigation mode transition lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the specific replay navigation modes, a cherry navigation mode in which, when specific replays 1 and 2 are won, a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the 11th replay winning as a cherry replay is likely to occur, specific replays 1, A watermelon navigation mode is set in which a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the 12th re-game winning as a watermelon play is likely to occur when winning 2, and the winning probability of each navigation mode is set in the navigation mode table. . More specifically, BAR replay 1 and specific replay 1 are set so that the cherry navi mode winning probability is high, and BAR replay 2 and specific replay 2 are set so that the watermelon navi mode winning probability is high. The winning probability of these navigation mode transition lotteries is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the winning probability of BAR replays 1 and 2 and specific replays 1 and 2 is reduced to about 1/200 in the third RT state. It is set to win one of the navigation modes with a probability.

In step S2304, a navigation mode transition lottery is performed from the navigation mode table acquired in step S2303 and lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e. In this case, the result of the navigation mode shift lottery and the type of navigation mode when winning are stored in the register. After that, this process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 34, after executing the specific replay navigation mode lottery process in step S1015, in step S1016, it is determined whether or not the navigation mode transition lottery has been won. determines in step S1017 whether or not the winning navigation mode is the cherry navigation mode. If it is the cherry-navigation mode, a process of inputting 30 as a predetermined number to the cherry-navigation counter CTC of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1018. The cherry-navi counter CTC is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of continuations of the cherry-navi mode, and is decremented by one for each game in the cherry-navi mode. After that, in step S1019, a process of setting a cherry-navi flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and a process of setting a cherry-navi command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. exit. The cherry-navi flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the cherry-navigation mode is on. Further, in the display control device 81 that has received the cherry-navi command, the background color is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. The color is changed from the previous one (the background color is set to red), and the cherry high-probability image CNP including characters such as "cherry high-probability" is displayed in a predetermined area on the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, in the display screen). upper area).

If it is determined in step S1017 that the lottery for switching to the watermelon navigation mode instead of the cherry navigation mode has been won, the process proceeds to step S1020. In step S1020, a process of inputting 30 as a predetermined number to the watermelon navigation counter STC in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The watermelon navigation counter STC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the watermelon navigation mode continues, and is decremented by one for each game in the watermelon navigation mode. After that, in step S1021, a process of setting a watermelon navigation flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and a process of setting a watermelon navigation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, after which the AT addition process is finished. do. The watermelon navigation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the watermelon navigation mode is on. Further, in the display control device 81 that has received the watermelon navigation command, the background color is changed to the previous color on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. (the background color is set to green), and the watermelon high-probability image SNP including character display such as "watermelon high-probability" is displayed in a predetermined area in the auxiliary display section 65 (for example, the upper part of the display screen area).

To explain the difference in effects between the cherry navi mode and the watermelon navi mode, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 differs between the two navi modes (in the figure, hatches are displayed differently), and in the cherry navi mode, While the cherry high-probability image CNP is displayed in a predetermined area, the watermelon high-probability image SNP is displayed in a predetermined area in the watermelon navigation mode, so that the player can easily distinguish between the two navigation modes. is.

Next, processing during the specific replay navigation mode will be described.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the specific replay navigation lottery process executed when specific replays 1 and 2 are won. The specific replay navi lottery process is a process that is executed in step S1120 in the process for a pushing order.

In the specific replay navigation lottery process, lottery processing for cherry navigation and lottery processing for watermelon navigation are generally set. lottery processing is executed. This is done by prioritizing the side with lower benefits (Cherry Replay) than the side with higher benefits (additional winning rate, number of additional games) at the time of navi winning (Suikari Play). This is to increase rarity and avoid an increase in the payout rate.

That is, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the cherry navigation flag is set. If the cherry-navi flag is not set, the cherry-navi low probability table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a in step S2402. A cherry-navigation high-probability table is obtained from the storage area 105a. Then, in step S2404, Cherry Navi lottery processing is executed from these tables and lottery counters.

As shown in FIG. 56, the low-probability table and the high-probability table of Cherry Navi are set so that the probability of winning is uniformly about 0.05% regardless of the set value in the low-probability table. there is On the other hand, in the high-probability table, the probability of winning differs depending on the setting value, and in general, odd number settings of settings 1, 3, and 5 are set so that the winning probability is higher than even number settings of settings 2, 4, and 6. there is More specifically, the probability of winning is about 3.0%, 1.2%, 3.5%, 1.7%, 4.0%, 4.5% in order from setting 1 to setting 6, Although there is a difference between odds and odds, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning. Therefore, by setting to the cherry navigator mode, the pressing order notification effect for the 11th regame winning prize can occur with a high probability. is more likely to occur than the even number setting.

In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2404 has been won.If the lottery process has been won, in step S2406, the Cherry Navi winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and the main lottery End the process.

If it is determined in step S2405 that the player has not won the lottery, lottery processing for Suikanavi is performed in steps S2407 to S2412. That is, in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the Suikanavi flag has been set. If the Suikanavi flag is not set, the Suikanavi low probability table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a in step S2408, and if the Suikanavi flag is set, the various table storage area 105a Get the Suika Navi High Probability Table from Then, in step S2410, watermelonavi lottery processing is executed from these tables and lottery counters.

The low-probability table and high-probability table of Suika-navi are similar to those for cherry-navigation. As shown in FIG. set to win. On the other hand, in the high-probability table, the odds of winning differ depending on the set values. there is More specifically, the probability of winning is about 1.0%, 3.2%, 1.5%, 3.7%, 2.0%, 4.5% in order from setting 1 to setting 6, Although there is a difference between odds and odds, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning. Therefore, when the watermelon navigation mode is set, the pressing order notification effect for the 12th regame winning prize can occur with a high probability. It is more likely to occur than the odd number setting.

In addition, comparing the high-probability table for cherry navigator and the high-probability table for watermelon navigator, the table for watermelon navigator is set so that the difference in winning probability depending on the setting value is larger. In other words, in the watermelon navigation mode, it is easier to predict the set value from the navigation win than in the cherry navi mode, and in this respect as well, the superiority of the watermelon play over the cherry replay is ensured.

In step S2411, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S2410 has been won, and if the lottery process has been won, in step S2412, after setting the watermelon navigation winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d, this lottery process exit. If it is determined in step S2411 that the lottery has not been won, this lottery process is terminated.

Next, management of the number of games in the specific replay navigation mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57 for navigation mode processing. The navigation mode process is a process executed in step S1323 in the number-of-games management process.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the Cherry Navi flag is set. If the cherry-navigation flag is set, the number of cherry-navigation continuations is subtracted in step S2502. In this process, 1 is subtracted from the cherry-navi counter CTC. In the subsequent step S2503, it is determined whether or not the cherry-navi counter CTC has become 0. If it has become 0, the process of clearing the cherry-navigation flag is performed in step S2504. This terminates the Cherry Navi mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501 or step S2503, or if the process of step S2504 is executed, the process advances to step S2505. In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the watermelon navigation flag is set. If the Suikanavi flag is set, the Suikanavi continuation count is subtracted in step S2506. In this process, 1 is subtracted from the Suikanavi counter STC. In subsequent step S2507, it is determined whether or not the watermelon navigation counter STC has become 0. If it has become 0, processing for clearing the watermelon navigation flag is performed in step S2508. This terminates the Suika Navi mode.

As described above, when specific replays 1 and 2 are won during each navigation mode, a navigation lottery for realizing cherry replay or watermelon play is won with a high probability, and a cherry navigation winning flag or a watermelon navigation winning flag is set. By setting these navi win flags, affirmative determination is made in step S1121 of the pushing order process, and after steps S1122 to S1128, the corresponding pushing order is determined in step S1130. A specific pressing order notification command including information is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . That is, when the cherry navigation win flag is set, a specific push order notification command including information on the push order corresponding to the 11th regame win is set in step S1130, and the watermelon navigation win flag is set. In this case, in step S1130, a specific pressing order notification command including information on the pressing order corresponding to the 12th replay winning prize is set. Then, in the pressing order notification processing (FIG. 49) on the display control device 81 side, if a specific pressing order notification command is received when specific replays 1 and 2 are won (step S1912: YES), even if cherry navi winning For example, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and a pressing order notification effect for the 11th re-game winning prize is performed (step S1914). (step S1915). As a result, the player can achieve the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning.

On the other hand, if the cherry navigation lottery or the watermelon navigation lottery is not won, a negative determination is made in step S1121 of the pushing order processing, and in this case, a pushing order notification command corresponding to the first regame winning prize is issued. is output (step S1106), the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed in the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the player cannot establish the 11th re-game win or the 12th re-game win.

Here, as described above, when the pressing order notification command is output, the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side and the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side have the same content, but the specific pressing is performed. When the order notification command is output, the contents of the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side and the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(a), for example, when a specific replay 1 is won, a pressing order notification command is output, and a pressing order that establishes the first replay win is reported. Both of the push order notification on the main control device 101 side and the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side have contents corresponding to the first re-game winning, and the player follows either of them in the same way. The first replay win is established.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59(b), when the specific replay 1 is won, a specific pressing order notification command is output, and when the pressing order for establishing the 11th replay win is reported, In the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is performed, but in the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side, the pressing order corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed. Forward notification is performed, and the contents of both notifications are different. In this case, the display area of the auxiliary display unit 65 is larger than that of the instruction monitor 68, and is easy to catch the player's eye. It is considered that the player performs an operation so as to establish the 11th re-game winning according to the content of the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 side. However, even if the first re-game winning is established according to the pushing order information on the main control device 101 side, the player will not be substantially disadvantaged, and it is left to the player's will to follow which way. ing.

In other words, the specific push order notification command does not change the content of the push order notification on the main controller 101 side within a range that does not cause a change in the player's profit. It can be said that the instruction function is changed within a range that does not change the profit of the player.

In this way, when the specific replay navigation mode is set, the occurrence rate of the 11th replay winning prize and the 12th replay winning prize changes. In this case, the winning probabilities of the specific replays 1 and 2 do not change, and the appearance rate changes only with a change in the manner of notification of the pressing order as the instruction function.

<MY high probability processing>
Next, the MY high-probability mode as a configuration for changing the pointing function in this embodiment will be described.

The MY high-probability mode is a mode in which the instruction function changes based on the value of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY managed in the MY update process in the second section display process. More specifically, the MY high probability mode is based on the number of increases/decreases in the advantageous section MY (specific increase/decrease number), which is the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts in each game after a predetermined start condition is established in the advantageous section. , and AT mode as an instruction function are improved. When the MY high-probability mode is entered, a MY high-probability table different from the normal-use additional lottery table is selected in the AT mode additional lottery. The MY high-probability table is set so as to increase the probability of winning an additional lottery in an additional lottery with a predetermined result.

Whether or not there is a shift to the MY high-probability mode is managed by the MY high-probability processing (step S1606) started in the MY update processing. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing MY high probability processing.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (hereinafter simply referred to as MY counter) is 200 or more as the first specific number. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of increased game media after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is 200 or more. If the number is 200 or more, the process advances to step S2602 to determine whether or not the MY counter is 250 or more as the second specific number and the increased number of game media is 250 or more. If the number is less than 250 and the MY counter (increased number of game media) is 200 or more and less than 250, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the watermelon high probability flag is set in the various counter areas 106e. If the watermelon high probability flag is not set, the watermelon high probability flag is set in step S2604, and in step S2605, 50 is input as a predetermined number to the watermelon counter SC provided in each counter area. to run. The watermelon high-probability flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode is the MY high-probability mode for watermelon in which the winning probability is increased when the watermelon is won. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the high-probability mode.

In subsequent step S2606, a process of setting a watermelon high probability start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The watermelon high-probability start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode for watermelon is starting. The display control device 81 that has received the watermelon high-probability start command, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, a watermelon top-up image SUP including characters such as "Winning a watermelon gives you a chance to top-up!" Further, when the MY high probability mode for watermelon is started, the display of the number of continuous games (50 games) in the MY high probability mode for watermelon is started.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the MY counter is equal to or greater than 250 as the second specific number, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the watermelon high probability flag has been set. If the watermelon high-probability flag is set, the process of clearing the watermelon high-probability flag is executed in step S2608, and the watermelon high-probability end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S2609. process.

That is, the MY high-probability mode for watermelon is a mode that is set when the MY counter reaches a first specific number or more, and is canceled when the MY counter reaches a second specific number. Only the watermelon winning probability will be improved. The watermelon high-probability end command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode for watermelon is to end.

After making a negative determination in step S2601 or step S2607, after making an affirmative determination in step S2603, or after executing the process of step S2606 or step S2609, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, it is determined whether or not the MY counter is 500 or more as the third specific number. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of increased game media after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous section is 500 or more. If the number is 500 or more, the process advances to step S2611 to determine whether or not the MY counter is 550 or more as the fourth specific number and the increased number of game media is 550 or more. If the number is less than 550 and the MY counter (increased number of game media) is 500 or more and less than 550, the process proceeds to step S2612.

In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the cherry high probability flag is set in the various counter areas 106e. If the cherry high probability flag is not set, the cherry high probability flag is set in step S2613, and in step S2614, 50 is input as a predetermined number to the cherry counter CC provided in each counter area. to run. The cherry high-probability flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode is the MY high-probability mode for cherries that increases the winning probability when winning a cherry. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the high-probability mode.

In subsequent step S2615, a process of setting a cherry high-probability start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The cherry high-probability start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode for cherry is to be started. The display control device 81 that has received the cherry high-probability start command, for example, as shown in FIG. For example, a cherry-upon image CUP including characters such as "Cherry winning and extra chance!!" Also, when the MY high probability mode for cherries is started, the display of the number of continuous games (50 games) in the MY high probability mode for cherries is started.

If it is determined in step S2611 that the MY counter is equal to or greater than 550 as the fourth specific number, it is determined in step S2616 whether or not the cherry high probability flag has been set. If the cherry high-probability flag is set, the process of clearing the cherry high-probability flag is executed in step S2617, and the cherry high-probability end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S2618. process.

That is, the MY high probability mode for cherry is a mode that is set when the MY counter reaches a third specific number or more, and is canceled when the MY counter reaches a fourth specific number. Only when the cherry is won, the added winning probability will be improved. The cherry high-probability end command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the MY high-probability mode for cherries is to end.

<Acquisition processing of additional lottery table>
Next, in the MY high-probability mode for watermelon and the high-probability mode for cherry, how the addition performance as the instruction function is improved will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61 showing the processing for acquiring the addition lottery table. The acquisition process of the additional lottery table is a process that is executed at the time of the additional lottery at step S1003 in the process for AT addition and step S1122 in the process for pushing order.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the watermelon high probability flag is set. When the watermelon high probability flag is set, in step S2702, the watermelon counter SC is decremented by 1, and the watermelon subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the watermelon subtraction command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to update the display of the number of continuous games in the MY high probability mode for watermelon by subtracting 1 when completing the game.

In the subsequent step S2703, it is determined whether or not the watermelon counter SC has reached 0. If it has reached 0, the watermelon high probability flag is cleared in step S2704, and the watermelon high probability end command is displayed. A process of setting an output target to the control device 81 is performed. After that, in step S2705, the processing for obtaining the MY high probability table for watermelon is executed, and then the processing for obtaining the additional lottery table ends. That is, the MY high probability mode for watermelon ends when the MY counter reaches 250 as the second specific number, and the number of times the MY high probability table for watermelon is obtained reaches 50 times as the predetermined number. That is, the game may end when 50 games have been played.

As shown in FIG. 36, the MY high-probability table for watermelon has a winning probability of strong watermelon, weak watermelon, 1 strong watermelon overlap, 1 weak watermelon overlap, and an additional lottery triggered by watermelon play, which is higher than the normal table. , and the indicator function as an added winning probability has been improved. More specifically, the MY high-probability table for watermelon is set so that each combination described above is twice as likely to be won as the winning probability of the normal table. However, the number of games to be added at the time of winning is the same as that of the normal table, and the function of indicating the number of games to be added is not improved. In addition, the MY high probability table for watermelon includes roles other than the above-mentioned additional winning probability, such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1, and cherry replay. The winning probability of the lottery is the same as that of the normal table, and the number of additional games at the time of winning is also the same. In other words, the MY high probability table for watermelon is a table in which the instruction function as the additional winning probability is improved only in each target combination, and does not change for non-target combinations and other instruction functions (Fig. 62 ( c) see).

If it is determined in step S2701 that the watermelon high probability flag has not been set, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the cherry high probability flag has been set. If the cherry high probability flag is set, in step S2707, the cherry counter CC is decremented by 1, and the cherry subtraction command is set to be output to the display control device 81. Upon receiving the cherry subtraction command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 to update the display of the number of continuous games in the MY high-probability mode for cherries by subtracting one.

In the following step S2708, it is determined whether or not the cherry counter CC has reached 0. If it has become 0, the high probability flag for cherry is cleared in step S2709, and the high probability end command for cherry is displayed. A process of setting an output target to the control device 81 is performed. After that, in step S2710, the process of acquiring the MY high probability table for cherry is executed, and then the process of acquiring the additional lottery table ends. That is, the MY high-probability mode for cherries also ends when the MY counter reaches 550 as the fourth specific number, and the number of times the MY high-probability table for cherries is obtained reaches 50 as the predetermined number of times. In other words, the game may end when 50 games have been played.

In the MY high probability table for cherries, as shown in FIG. 36, the winning probability of the additional lottery triggered by strong cherries, weak cherries, duplicate strong cherries 1, duplicate weak cherries 1, and cherry replay is higher than the normal table. , and the indicator function as an added winning probability has been improved. More specifically, the MY high-probability table for cherries is set so that each winning combination is twice as likely to be won as the winning probability of the normal table. However, the number of games to be added at the time of winning is the same as that of the normal table, and the function of indicating the number of games to be added is not improved. In addition, the MY high-probability table for cherries includes roles other than the above-mentioned additional winning probability, such as strong watermelon, weak watermelon, strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, and watermelon play. The winning probability of the lottery is the same as that of the normal table, and the number of additional games at the time of winning is also the same. In other words, the MY high-probability table for cherries is also a table in which the instruction function as the added winning probability is improved only in each of the above target hands, and does not change for non-target hands and other instruction functions (Fig. 62). (c)).

If it is determined in step S2706 that the cherry high probability flag has not been set, it is not in any of the MY high probability modes. End the process.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the specific replay navigation modes, the watermelon navigation mode that improves the winning rate of watermelon play when specific replays 1 and 2 are won, and the cherry navigation mode that improves the winning rate of cherry replay are set. It is By causing the shift to the navigation mode, the game result that triggers the additional lottery is likely to occur, and the expectation that the number of games in the AT mode will be increased increases. Furthermore, based on the MY counter, it is possible to shift to the MY high probability mode for watermelon and the MY high probability mode for cherry. As the probability itself improves, the expectation that the number of AT mode games will be increased increases.

In this way, the specific replay navigation mode alone can be expected to add AT mode, and the MY high probability mode alone can be expected to add AT mode. This duplication synergistically heightens expectations for additional premiums.

In other words, the watermelon navigation mode, in which the winning rate of watermelon play is high, and the MY high probability mode for watermelon, in which the odds of winning in watermelon play are high, overlap, and the cherry navigation mode in which the winning rate of cherry replay is high, By overlapping with the MY high probability mode for cherry, which increases the probability of winning in cherry replays, etc., the expectation for the addition increases dramatically, while the watermelon navigation mode and the MY high probability mode for cherry Even if the cherry navigation mode and the MY high-probability mode for watermelon overlap, the increase in the degree of expectation for the addition is about the additional degree of expectation between them alone. Therefore, it is not only sufficient if overlap occurs, but the degree of expectation varies greatly depending on the combination in which the overlap occurs, making it possible to provide an interesting game that attracts the player.

In particular, since the MY high-probability mode shifts based on the MY counter, it is possible to break away from the gameplay of simply aiming to increase the number of medals in the AT mode, and further additions can be expected with the increased number of medals. A novel game property such as becoming like this is realized.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, as described above, the number of initial games in the AT mode is 50, and an increase of about 1.90 medals per game can be expected in the AT mode. The MY counter that causes the transition is set as a value that is difficult to reach in the initial number of games. By doing this, first, instead of expecting the MY high probability mode, the number of AT mode games is increased by ordinary extra lottery etc., and as a result, the MY high probability mode is given. , without overturning the premise of the conventional game, it is possible to enjoy the novel game without a sense of incongruity.

Here, as described above, the watermelon MY high probability mode is set when the MY counter is 200-249, and the cherry MY high probability mode is set when the MY counter is 500-549. The target MY counter values are determined so that the MY high-probability modes do not overlap each other. Therefore, for example, due to the overlap of both MY high-probability modes, an event such as an increase in the number of games up to the upper limit of the advantageous section in one MY high-probability mode does not occur. It is designed not to be too high.

On the other hand, as for the navigation modes when the specific replays 1 and 2 are won, duplication of both modes is allowed in the specific replay navigation mode lottery. That is, the cherry navigation mode can be set during the watermelon navigation mode, and the watermelon navigation mode can be set during the cherry navigation mode.

That is, for example, in a situation where the watermelon navigation mode and the watermelon MY high probability mode overlap as shown in FIG. 63(a), the cherry navigation mode is also set as shown in FIG. may occur. In this case, in the specific replay navi lottery process (FIG. 55), as the pushing order notification effect when specific replays 1 and 2 are won, of the 11th replay as a cherry replay and the 12th regame as a watermelon play, Priority is given to the pressing order notification effect that establishes the winning of the cherry replay. Therefore, if you win the Navi for winning the Cherry Replay, you will not win the Navi for winning the Suika Replay. However, in FIG. 63(a), since it is rare to win the cherry replay winning navigation, such an event is unlikely to occur, and the benefits of the watermelon navigation mode can be preferably enjoyed.

On the other hand, if the watermelon navigation mode and the cherry navigation mode overlap, as shown in FIG. 63(b), it is easier to win the cherry replay winning navigation. Navigation for cherry replay prizes is more likely to occur. That is, in a situation where the watermelon MY high-probability mode is set, it is undesirable for the player to set the cherry navigation mode.

These navigation modes are set to end when a predetermined number of games (30 games) are played. If the navigation modes overlap as described above, as shown in FIG. The cherry-navi mode set later continues longer than the watermelon-navi mode set to 1, and the cherry-navi mode also ends when the number of continuous games becomes zero.

On the other hand, since the increase/decrease mode of the MY counter differs depending on the lottery result of each game, the presence or absence of winning, etc., the number of continuous games may change in the MY high probability mode. Therefore, the processing for adjusting the number of games in the MY high-probability mode will be described below.

<Bell notification processing>
First, the bell notification process performed by main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bell notification process is a process that is executed when the bell is won in the pushing order in the pushing order process. As already explained, when the pushing order bell is won, the winning of the 1st small winning combination in which 9 medals are paid out, the winning of the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination in which 3 medals are paid out, There may be a dropout in which no medal is paid out.

First, in step S2801, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification for the first minor combination of paying out 9 coins is performed as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. In the subsequent step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current state is the MY high probability mode, with either the watermelon high probability flag or the cherry high probability flag being set. If the MY high-probability mode is not set, in step S2803, after setting the pressing order notification command for the first minor combination of paying out 9 coins as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the bell notification process is executed. finish. As described above, in the AT mode, the processing of steps S2801 to S2803 is basically performed, thereby making it possible to increase the number of medals possessed.

If it is determined in step S2802 that it is one of the MY high-probability modes, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether the current MY counter is in the range of 230-249 and 530-549. A positive determination in step S2804 means the situation after the middle stage in the MY high-probability mode for watermelon or the MY high-probability mode for cherry. In other words, when the MY counter is within these ranges, it means that it is in the latter half of the range of 200 to 249 set in the MY high-probability mode for watermelon. It means that it is in the latter half of the range of 500 to 549 set in the high probability mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2804, the process advances to step S2803 to perform processing for setting a pressing order notification command for the first minor combination of paying out 9 coins, and then terminate the bell notification processing.

Here, the range of the value of the MY counter set in each MY high probability mode (the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number) is the difference in the number of payouts of each minor combination that can be won when the bell is won in the order of pressing. It is set to be larger than (9 cards-3 cards=6 cards) and to be larger than the maximum number of payouts for each minor winning combination that can be won when the bell is won in the pressing order. Therefore, in the case of shifting to the MY high-probability mode, in the next game, even if any small combination wins when the bell is won in the pressing order (even if the small combination with the maximum number of payouts wins), The event that the MY high-probability mode ends based on the winning of the top bell does not occur.

Also, the range of the value of the MY counter (difference between the first specific number and the second specific number) is set to be larger than twice the number of payouts for the minor combination, which is the maximum number of payouts when the winning order of the bell is won. is set. Therefore, when the MY high-probability mode is entered due to winning the winning order of the bell, the MY high-probability mode may end in the next game regardless of the difference between the MY counter and the first specific number. No.

In this way, in relation to the pressing order bell, there is no occurrence of an obstacle to the enjoyment of the MY high-probability mode.

Incidentally, cherry replays and watermelon plays, which are targeted to improve the extra winning rate in each MY high-probability mode, are not subject to increase/decrease of the MY counter. Therefore, the event that the MY high-probability mode is likely to be terminated by winning/winning a result for which the additional winning rate is improved does not occur.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2804 is affirmative, and the situation is after the middle stage of each MY high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2805, and the specific pressing order of the 2nd to 26th small wins in which 3 coins are paid out. A process of setting the notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. As already explained, when the pressing order bell is won, 1 or 2 operation orders correspond to the first minor winning combination in which 9 coins are paid out, and the remaining 4 or 5 operation orders correspond to the 1st small combination in which 3 coins are paid out. It corresponds to the 2nd small win to the 26th small win. In this case, in step S2805, if the current pressing order bells are bells 1 and 2, a specific pressing order notification command for reporting the operation order of left→right→middle is set as a predetermined operation order, If it is another pressing order bell, a specific pressing order notification command for reporting the operation order of left→middle→right is set as a predetermined operation order. Note that the predetermined operation order may be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

When the specific pressing order notification command is output, the contents of the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side and the contents of the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side are different. That is, the main control device 101 side performs the push order notification that 9 coins are paid out, and the display control device 81 side performs the push order notification effect that 3 coins are paid out.

As already explained, for the 2nd to 26th small wins in which 3 coins are paid out, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the same order, winning is not necessarily achieved, and the corresponding pattern is valid. It is necessary to operate at a timing when the line can be stopped (see FIGS. 19 and 20). Therefore, in the present embodiment, first, in step S2806, a symbol notification command including a stop mode of winning a small winning combination corresponding to the current pressing order bell is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. For example, if the lottery result of the game this time is that the middle push bell is won out of the push order bells, the symbol notification command includes stop modes corresponding to winning the 2nd, 7th and 9th minor wins. Include information.

In step S2807, it is determined whether the current MY counter is in the range of 240-249 and 540-549. The affirmative determination in step S2807 means the final stage of the MY high-probability mode for watermelons and the MY high-probability mode for cherries. In other words, when the MY counter is included in these ranges, it means that it is in the final stage of the range of 200 to 249 set in the MY high probability mode for watermelon, and the MY high probability mode for cherries is at the final stage. It means that it is the final stage in the range of 500 to 549 set to , and means that the MY high probability mode will end with a slight increase in medals. More specifically, the MY high-probability mode is terminated when the first minor winning combination of nine payouts continues for two games. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, the bell notification process is terminated.

If the determination in step S2807 is affirmative and the MY high-probability mode ends when the number of medals is increased a little more, then in step S2808, a failure notification lottery process is executed. The dropout notification lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether or not to assist in decreasing the MY counter without causing three medals to be paid out. there is In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the player has won the dropout notification lottery in step S2808, and if the player has won, in step S2810, a dropout for assisting the dropout of each minor winning combination of three payouts. After setting the notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the bell notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the player has not won the dropout notification lottery, in step S2811, although the dropout is not assisted, a dropout challenge notification is provided to suggest that the dropout will be advantageous to the player in the long run. After executing the process of setting the command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the bell notification process ends.

<Bell notification adjustment process>
Next, the bell notification adjusting process (step S1917) executed when the bell is won in the pressing order in the pressing order notification process on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the specific pressing order notification command has been received. When the specific pressing order notification command has not been received, the normal pressing order notification command has been received. In this case, the pressing order notification corresponding to the 1st minor combination winning prize in which 9 coins are paid out in step S2902. After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect is performed, this bell notification adjustment processing is terminated. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(a1) and 66(b1), the contents of the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side and the contents of the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side match.

If the specific pressing order notification command is received in step S2901, it means that the MY high probability mode is in the middle stage or later as described above. is received or not. If these commands are received, it means that the MY high-probability mode is at the final stage as described above. If a negative determination is made in step S2903, that is, if it has not progressed to the final stage even after the middle stage in the MY high probability mode, in step S2904 the 2nd small combination to 26th small combination in which 3 cards are paid out After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the corresponding pressing order notification effect and the symbol notification corresponding to the second to 26th minor winnings are performed, the bell notification adjusting process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(a2) and 66(b2), the content of the push order notification on the main controller 101 side and the content of the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side are different. On the 101 side, the pressing order notification of paying out 9 cards is performed, and on the display control device 81 side, the pressing order notification performance of paying out 3 cards is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 66(a3) and 66(c), after the first reel and the second reel have stopped, the third reel is notified of the symbol to be aimed at on the activated line. . In the figure, a "red bell" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L as the first reel, a "red 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M as the second reel, and a right reel as the third reel. If it is possible to stop the "white bell" symbol on the lower stage of the reel 32R, it means that the 7th minor winning combination is established and three medals are paid out. That is, in this case, if the "white bell" symbol can be stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R, the MY counter will not increase or decrease, and the MY high probability mode will continue without reducing the number of medals held. On the other hand, if the "white bell" symbol cannot be stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R, the MY counter is decreased by 3, and the MY high probability mode continues, but the number of medals held decreases.

In step S2903, the notification command for the failure notification or the notification command for the failure challenge has been received, and if the MY high-probability mode is the final stage, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not a command for notifying that the player has not received the command is received. If the command has been received, then in step S2906, the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed so as to notify the player that the player has not received a three-card payout small winning combination. If the notification command for the missed challenge has been received, in step S2907 the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the notification for the missed challenge of the 3-card payout small combination is performed, and then this bell. End the notification adjustment process.

In these cases, as shown in FIGS. 67(a1) and 67(b1), the content of the push order notification on the main controller 101 side and the content of the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side are different, and the main control On the side of the device 101, notification of the pressing order of payout of 9 cards is performed, and on the side of the display control device 81, the performance of notification of the pressing order of paying out of 3 cards is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 67(a2) and 67(c), in the missing notification, after the first reel and the second reel have stopped, the third reel is notified of the symbols to be aimed at on the effective line. Design notification is performed. In the figure, a "red bell" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L as the first reel, a "red 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M as the second reel, and a right reel as the third reel. If it is possible to stop the "watermelon" symbol on the lower stage of the reel 32R, it means that the 7th minor winning combination is not established and the situation is such that the win is lost. That is, in this case, if the "watermelon" symbol can be stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R, the MY counter is decreased by 3, and although the number of medals held is reduced, the MY high probability mode is returned to the middle stage where the MY high probability mode can still continue. be able to. On the other hand, if the "watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped on the lower row of the right reel 32R, the MY counter will not increase or decrease, and the situation in which the MY high probability mode is likely to end will continue. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67(a3), in the notification for the drop-off challenge, in the same situation as in FIG. When one of them stops, an image is displayed suggesting that one of them will win a small winning combination of three payouts and the other will fail. In this case, after the player selects which symbol to aim at, the player performs the stop operation of the third reel at his/her will.

As described above, in the MY high-probability mode for watermelon and the MY high-probability mode for cherries, when the MY counter reaches the middle or later stages of the range of the high-probability mode, 9 coins, which is the maximum number of payouts, will be paid out when the bell is won in the order of pushing. Instead of the pushing order notification effect corresponding to the 1st small role winning, the pushing order notification corresponding to the 2nd small role winning to the 26th small role winning of 3 payouts with fewer payouts than the 1st small role winning A performance is held. Then, in the final stage, a notification is given to cause even the 2nd to 26th small wins, in which 3 coins are to be paid out, to be missed through a dropout notification lottery. That is, based on the MY counter, the aspect of the pressing order notification effect as an instruction function when winning the pressing order bell is changed. As a result, in each MY high-probability mode whose range is defined by the MY counter, it is possible to adjust the MY counter so that it does not go out of range. More specifically, by preventing the MY counter from going out of range and increasing the MY counter, it is possible to adjust so that the situation in which the winning probability of the corresponding result is improved continues for a long time.

However, as described above, each MY high-probability mode has an upper limit of the number of games, and the MY counter goes out of range, and the game ends when the upper limit of the number of games is completed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the winning probability of the corresponding result is improved endlessly.

<Game flow>
The relationship between the MY high-probability mode defined by the MY counter and the navigation mode will be described along the flow of the game with reference to FIG.

When the advantageous section starts at the timing of t1 and the AT mode starts at the timing of t2, the counting of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) starts at the timing of t2 (more specifically, the number of medals increases start after the start). At t2, the initial number of AT mode games is set, and the remaining number of AT mode games is subtracted for each game. In the AT mode, an increase in medals occurs due to notification of the pressing order, and at the timing of t3 when the number of medals increases reaches 200 as the first specific number, the MY high probability mode (MY high probability mode for watermelon) is entered. set. In the figure, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the number of games that can reach the MY high probability mode is set as the initial number of games, but as described above, the initial number of games is MY high probability mode. MY high-probability mode will be reached through the additional additions on the way.

As described above, the MY high-probability mode improves the additional winning rate in the target result. That is, the processing mode of the additional winning process that causes a change in the number of remaining games in the AT mode as an instruction function is changed (the additional winning rate is improved). However, the MY high-probability mode ends when the MY counter reaches the second specific number (250). A game for avoiding and maintaining the current number of medals is played. In this case, various notifications based on the bell notification adjustment process as described above assist the game. Then, the user waits for the navigation mode to be set so that the results targeted for the MY high-probability mode can appear with a high probability. It should be noted that even if the navigation mode is not set, the target results may appear, but they are omitted in the figure.

When the watermelon navigation mode is set at the timing of t5, the appearance rate of results targeted for the MY high probability mode is improved. At timings t6 and t7, the number of AT mode games is added.

In the MY high-probability mode, the upper limit number of games is predetermined, and when the upper limit number of games is reached at the timing of t8, the MY high-probability mode ends. In this case, the game for maintaining the current number of medals as described above is stopped, and the game is shifted to a game for increasing the number of medals. Note that an upper limit number of games is predetermined for the navigation mode as well, and when the upper limit number of games is reached at timing t9, the navigation mode ends.

At the timing of t20, when the MY counter reaches 500 as the third specific number, the MY high probability mode (MY high probability mode for cherry) is set again. Then, as described above, the game is performed, for example, from the timing of t21 to wait for the setting of the navigation mode in which the results targeted for the MY high-probability mode can appear with a high probability.

The figure shows a case where the corresponding navigation mode (cherry navigation mode) is not set during the MY high-probability mode started at t20, and in this case, the MY counter becomes the fourth specific number. At the timing of t22 when it reaches 550, the MY high probability mode ends. After that, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0 at the timing of t23, the AT mode ends and the advantageous section also ends.

In this case, as described above, in order to wait for the corresponding navigation mode to be set in the MY high-probability mode, or to play as many games as possible in the MY high-probability mode, a game that attempts to maintain the current state of the medals is performed (t4-t8, t21-t22), the medal increase speed is suppressed accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy more games in the advantageous section where the upper limit increase number of medals is set. You will reach the maximum number of games.

More specifically, in the AT mode, you can expect an increase of about 1.90 medals per game, but the maximum number of games in each MY high probability mode is 50 games, and each MY high probability mode has a MY counter. It is configured to be terminated when the number reaches 50. In other words, normally, the MY high probability mode ends after about 25 games, but by pressing the MY high probability mode and adjusting the number of times when the order bell is won, the number of games will be doubled as the MY high probability mode. It is possible to do it. In this case, in the MY high-probability mode, the average increase in number of medals per game is about 1.0, which is about 1/2 of the normal increase. That is, by using the MY high-probability mode, it is possible not only to improve the degree of expectation to be added as described above and to make the game more interesting, but also to suppress the medal increase speed, and to notify the pushing order. It has also succeeded in making the game more enjoyable during the advantageous section where the game is performed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the MY counter falls within the range of the first specific number to the second specific number during the advantageous section, the MY high probability mode is set to increase the winning rate as an instruction function. Therefore, in the advantageous section, not only is the MY counter increased by obtaining a large number of medals, but the MY counter is kept within the range of the first specific number and the second specific number. It is possible to realize a new game property that breaks away from the game property of obtaining many medals.

In particular, in the MY high probability mode, in the MY high probability mode for watermelon, the winning probability increases in strong watermelon, weak watermelon, watermelon play, etc., and in the MY high probability mode for cherry, in strong cherry, weak cherry, cherry replay, etc. Since the winning probability is increased, it is not only necessary to simply enter the MY high probability mode, but it is also possible to draw attention to the results of the game during that time, improving the interest of the game using the MY high probability mode. is planned.

These game results with improved performance in each MY high-probability mode appear based on the lottery result of the lottery process of each game, regardless of the MY counter. Therefore, even though the game uses the MY counter, it is premised on the game using the result of the conventional game, and even with the novel game nature, the player can enjoy it without discomfort.

In addition, by providing a navigation mode that increases the appearance rate of cherry replay and watermelon play, which are the targets of the MY high probability mode, and setting this navigation mode regardless of the MY counter, it is possible to match each game. While making good use of the relationships, it is possible to achieve a relatively simple configuration and easy-to-understand gameplay.

By overlapping these navigation modes and MY high-probability modes, it is configured to synergistically improve the degree of expectation for the addition. Therefore, for example, before being set to the MY high probability mode for watermelon or the MY high probability mode for cherry, the corresponding navigation mode transition lottery such as watermelon navigation mode or cherry navigation mode is won, and the corresponding navigation mode is set. If the situation is such that the corresponding MY high-probability mode is set as soon as possible, the increase in the MY counter, that is, the increase in medals, can be expected to be more than just an increase in medals. becomes.

When the MY high-probability mode is set without being set to each navigation mode, expectations are set for the lottery results of each game so that the navigation mode corresponding to the MY high-probability mode is set as early as possible. It can hold you a lot.

In each MY high-probability mode, the pressing-order notification effect at the time of winning the push-order bell changes, and the assist is performed to extend the MY high-probability mode, thereby increasing the winning probability of the corresponding results. Not only the game of continuing, but also the game of maintaining the state of waiting for transition to the corresponding navigation mode can be performed.

The first specific number set as the MY high probability mode is a value that is difficult to reach with only the initial number of games in the AT mode. be able to.

By the way, the explanation above is based on the premise that the appearance rate of watermelon play and cherry replay increases by shifting to watermelon navigation mode and cherry navigation mode as described above, but it is also possible to shift to the first BB state or second BB state. Increases the appearance rate of target results in high-probability mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 28, in the first BB state, it is easy to win strong cherries and weak cherries, and in the second BB state, it is easy to win strong watermelons and weak watermelons. Therefore, even if you shift to the 2nd BB state in the MY high probability mode for watermelon, you can expect an addition to the MY high probability mode for watermelon, and you can also shift to the 1BB state in the MY high probability mode for cherries. , You can expect to add in MY high probability mode for cherry. However, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the medal increase speed is higher than in the AT mode in the third RT state. From this point of view, it can be said that a transition to the navigation mode corresponding to the MY high-probability mode is a favorable event for the player.

On the other hand, if you win the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, the winning flag will be carried over even if you do not win in the winning game. It is also possible to play a game in which the player reaches the mode and wins the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the configuration of the specific replay navigation mode is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the rate of appearance of cherry replays and watermelon replays is varied by the pressing order notification effect of specific replays 1 and 2 that are won in the 3rd RT state, but in this modification, cherry replays and watermelon replays are changed. It is realized by the RT state in which the winning probability of the watermelon play becomes high.

FIG. 69(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery result of the game and the prize mode. In this modified example, a 13th replay and a 14th replay are set as replay results in which a replay is awarded when a prize is won, in addition to the above. When the 13th re-game win or the 14th re-game win is established, the RT state shifts to the 4th RT state. The fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and when the number of games is completed, the fourth RT state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, during the AT mode, after shifting to the normal game state, it returns to the third RT state through the first RT state and the second RT state by the press order notification.

Figure 69 (b) ~ Figure 69 (d) shows a part of the lottery table in this modification, Figure 69 (b) is the 3rd RT state, Figure 69 (c) is shifted by the 13th replay winning a prize FIG. 69(d) is a part of the lottery table of the 4th RT state which is shifted by the 14th regame win. In this modification, specific replays 3 and 4 with IV=59 and 60 are set instead of specific replays 1 and 2 with IV=13 and 14, and IV=13 and 14 are set in any lottery table. Also the point value PV is set to 0. Winning the specific replay 3 of IV=59 enables the 11th replay winning as a cherry replay, and winning the specific replay 4 of IV=60 enables the 12th replay winning as the watermelon play. Also, if the IV=61 cherry RT transition replay is won, the above-mentioned 13th re-game winning is possible, and if the IV=62 watermelon RT transition replay is won, the above-mentioned 14th re-game winning is possible. .

In the lottery table for the 3rd RT state in FIG. 69(b), specific replays 3 and 4 with IV = 59 and 60 are not won, and in cherry RT transition replays and watermelon RT transition replays with IV = 61 and 62, Each is set so that the probability of winning is about 1/200.

In the lottery table for the 4th RT state that shifts due to the 13th replay winning of FIG. is set so as not to win a prize, nor to win a cherry RT transition replay and a watermelon RT transition replay with IV=61 and 62.

In the lottery table for the 4th RT state that shifts due to the 13th replay win of FIG. , and is set so as not to be won in the cherry RT transition replay and the watermelon RT transition replay with IV=61, 62.

The RT state processing of this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the fourth RT state by confirming whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM106. If it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S3002 to perform subtraction processing for the number of fixed RT games. As described above, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the processing in step S3002 is processing for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. In subsequent step S3003, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of step S3002. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S3004, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S3004, the game state shifts to the normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S3003, this RT state processing ends. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, processing for the first RT state to the third RT state is performed in steps S3005 to S3015. These processes are the same as steps S501 to S511 described above.

If it is determined in step S3013 that the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S3016, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, the thirteenth It is determined whether or not a re-game winning prize or a 14th re-game winning prize has been established. When neither the 13th re-game winning nor the 14th re-game winning has been established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the 13th re-game winning prize or the 14th re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S3017, and the transition replay that won this time is performed in step S3018. Set the corresponding 4th RT configuration flag. More specifically, when the 13th re-game win is established, the 4th RT setting flag for cherry is set, and when the 14th re-game win is established, the 4th RT setting flag for watermelon is set. Then, in step S3019, fixed RT game number setting processing is executed, and then this processing ends. Step S3019 is a process of setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state, and in this modification, 30 games are set as executable games in any fourth RT state.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the lottery process (FIG. 16) in this modification, if the above-mentioned fourth RT setting flag for cherry is set, the game is executed using the lottery table of FIG. 68(c). A lottery is performed, and if the fourth RT setting flag for watermelon is set, a lottery for the game is performed using the lottery table of FIG. 68(d). A lottery for the game is performed using these lottery tables, and if the fourth RT setting flag for cherry is set, the 11th replay win, which is a cherry replay, is established in about 1/10, If the 4th RT setting flag for watermelon is set, the 12th re-game win, which is the watermelon play, is established in about 1/10.

As described above, in this modified example, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs during the AT mode, so that cherry replays and watermelon replays are won with a high probability (about 1/10), and such cherry replays are performed. And you will be able to expect an addition triggered by the watermelon play.

In this case, it is possible to win cherry replays and watermelon plays without notification of the pressing order in each 4th RT state, so the winning rate is improved in the MY high probability mode for cherries and the MY high probability mode for watermelons. Regarding the target result, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of the target result without changing the instruction function. In this way, by consolidating changes in the instruction function into the MY high-probability mode, it leads to simplification of the processing configuration. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is difficult to distinguish between the changes.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 10 shows a modified example of the value (range) of the MY counter set to the MY high-probability mode; FIG.

FIG. 71(a) shows an example in which the value of the MY counter set to the MY high probability mode differs depending on the set value.

That is, the value of the MY counter set to the MY high probability mode for watermelon is the same as in the first embodiment, regardless of whether the set value is high or low. Also, when the MY counter is 200-249, the MY high probability mode for watermelon is set. On the other hand, the value of the MY counter that is set to the high probability mode for cherries differs depending on the set value. In settings 1 to 4, when the MY counter is between 500 and 549, the MY high probability mode for cherries is set. On the other hand, in settings 5 and 6, when the MY counter is 500 to 539, the MY high probability mode for cherry is set. Therefore, when the MY high-probability mode for cherries ends when the MY counter reaches 540, the player can grasp that the set value is 5 or 6.

In particular, in the multiple MY high-probability modes, by providing a setting difference in the MY high-probability mode for cherries, which is set by the MY counter with a large value, the MY counter becomes large and the set value can be predicted. It becomes possible configuration. As a result, it is possible to add not only the increase in medals but also the added value of being able to predict the set value to the expectation for the increase in medals in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the MY high-probability mode for cherries, the following effects can be expected by varying the value of the MY counter on the end side instead of the start side depending on the set value. That is, when comparing the start game and the end game of the MY high probability mode, the start game is more likely to be played by the gaming machine than the end game due to the expectation of the start of the MY high probability mode and the corresponding expectation effect. It can be said that it is easy to attract the eyes of not only the player who is playing the game, but also other players such as, for example, players who are playing adjacent gaming machines. In that regard, if the value of the MY counter on the end side rather than the start side is made different according to the set value as described above, it will be difficult for other players to notice the prediction of the set value while playing the game machine. It is possible to allow only the player to do so. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player who is playing the game machine causing the medal increase to the corresponding MY counter.

Moreover, as described above, in the present embodiment, the end game is extended, so even if the end game is different as described above, other players will not be able to use the MY high probability mode for cherries. It is difficult to distinguish whether the counter reaches 550 and ends or 540 and ends. From this point of view as well, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the players playing the gaming machine.

When the value of the MY counter set in the MY high-probability mode is changed according to the set value, in the MY high-probability processing (FIG. 60), the start and end of each MY high-probability mode are processed and the first In the specific number to the fourth specific number determination process (step S2601, step S2602, step S2610, step S2611), after referring to the set value, the corresponding threshold value of the MY counter is used to start or end the MY high probability mode. should be set. This can also be applied to other modifications, and even if the threshold value of the MY counter differs depending on the mode or due to other factors, the first specific number to It is preferable to vary the value determined in the fourth specific number determination process depending on the mode or factor.

FIG. 71(b) shows an example in which the probabilities set for the MY high-probability mode for watermelon and the MY high-probability mode for cherry are different depending on the setting values.

That is, in the MY high probability mode for watermelon, the probability set when the MY counter reaches 200 differs depending on the set value. In summary, the odd number settings of settings 1, 3, and 5 are easier to set to the watermelon MY high probability mode than the even number settings of settings 2, 4, and 6, and the higher the setting, the more likely it is to be set to the watermelon MY high probability mode. It is designed to make it easier.

In addition, in the MY high probability mode for cherries, the probability set when the MY counter reaches 500 differs depending on the set value. In general, even-numbered settings 2, 4, and 6 are easier to set to the MY high-probability mode for cherries than odd-numbered settings 1, 3, and 5, and the higher the setting, the more likely it is to be set to the MY high-probability mode for cherries. It is designed to make it easier.

By doing so, it is possible to predict whether the set values are even-odd or high/low by setting the MY high-probability mode for watermelon and the MY high-probability mode for cherries.

Here, when comparing the setting difference of the probability set in the MY high probability mode for watermelon and the setting difference in the probability set in the MY high probability mode for cherry, the MY high probability mode for cherry is better for watermelon. The setting difference is set to be larger than in the MY high probability mode. That is, the MY high-probability mode in which the MY counter is set to a large value is set so that the set value can be predicted more easily. By doing so, it is possible to add an added value to the expectation of an increase in medals in the advantageous section.

As described above, the probability that the MY high-probability mode is set when the predetermined MY counter is exceeded (the predetermined MY counter is reached) is the transition to be performed when the predetermined MY counter is exceeded. It indicates the winning probability of the lottery. In this case, by limiting the games in which the transition lottery is performed to games in which the predetermined MY counter has been exceeded or games corresponding thereto, it is possible to determine whether or not the MY high probability mode is set within the range starting from the predetermined MY counter. , will be determined by one transfer lottery. On the other hand, if the transition lottery is performed in each game in which the predetermined MY counter is exceeded or in a corresponding game, the range defined by the predetermined MY counter The starting game of the MY high-probability mode is changed. More specifically, in FIG. 71, in the former case, the probability of being set to the cherry high-probability mode in which the MY counter is set to 200-249 differs depending on the set value. In the latter case, the probability that the cherry high-probability mode is set from the game in which the MY counter exceeds 200 differs depending on the set value, and the cherry high-probability mode can be set in subsequent games.

In FIG. 72, the MY high-probability mode for cherries and the MY high-probability mode for watermelon are each set in a plurality of MY counter ranges, and an example in which setting differences are provided depending on the types of MY counter ranges. is shown.

That is, in the MY high probability mode for cherry, the MY counter can be set between 200-249 and 300-349. It is set so that there is a set difference in the set probability. In the watermelon MY high probability mode, the MY counter can be set between 500-549 and 600-649. It is set so that there is a set difference in the set probability.

In this way, by setting multiple ranges of the MY counter that is set in the MY high probability mode, it is possible to raise expectations for the MY high probability mode in multiple situations in the advantageous section, and multiple settings can be made. Thus, even if the MY high-probability mode is not set in one range, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the next range will be set.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the value of the MY counter set to the MY high probability mode and its range differ for each advantageous section.

In this modification, transition to the MY high probability mode is performed by a transition lottery in each game according to the value of the MY counter, and if the transition lottery is won, the corresponding MY high probability mode is set. and Then, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the MY high probability mode in each game is set differently depending on the value of the MY counter.

FIG. 73(a) is a flowchart showing the mode setting process at the start of the advantageous section. The mode setting process is, for example, a process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 32).

In step S3101, mode lottery processing is executed. The mode lottery process is a process of drawing lots for a mode table that defines the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the MY high-probability mode, which is set according to the value of the MY counter. That is, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 73(b), a mode A table and a mode B table are set as the lottery table for transition to the MY high probability mode. , the value of the MY counter that is likely to be won in the MY high probability mode and the value of the MY counter that is difficult to be won are different.

More specifically, for example, in the mode A table, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the MY high probability mode for watermelon is set so that the MY counter is set to be the highest within the range of 0 to 99 and 300 to 349. (for example, 10% winning probability in the transition lottery for each game), and the MY counter is set to be the next highest in the range of 100 to 199, 350 to 399, and 500 to 599 (for example, each game 5% probability of winning in the transition lottery), and the MY counter is set to be the next highest in the range of 200 to 249, 400 to 449, 600 and beyond (for example, the probability of winning is 1 in the transition lottery of each game). %), and when the MY counter is in the range of 250 to 299 and 450 to 499, it is set so that the transition lottery will not be won or it will be difficult to win (for example, the winning probability in the transition lottery of each game is 0.01%). On the other hand, in the mode B table, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the MY high-probability mode for watermelon is set to be the highest within the range of the MY counter from 0 to 99 and from 300 to 349. Although the points are common to the mode A table, the transition lottery winning probability in the range of the MY counter from 100 to 299, 400 and beyond is set differently from that of the mode A table.

The symbols (double circle, circle, triangle, cross) shown in the figure indicate the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the MY high-probability mode in each game, and the same symbol indicates the same winning probability. However, the probabilities may not be exactly the same, and some or all of the games may have different winning probabilities, as long as the probabilities are different in relation to other symbols. In addition, each game within the range of the same symbol may have different winning probabilities.

In addition, regarding the lottery for transition to MY high-probability mode for cherries, the most likely winning range differs between the Mode A table and the Mode B table. In the mode B table, the MY counter is set in the range of 450-499 so that winning is most likely.

Therefore, when the mode A table is selected and when the mode B table is selected, what kind of MY counter sets the MY high probability mode in the advantageous section is different. There will be a change in the pointing function where the modal superimposition takes place.

In step S3101, for example, a lottery is conducted so that mode A is selected with a predetermined probability (40%). Then, in step S3102, the result of step S3101 is determined, and if mode A, the mode A table is set as the MY high probability mode transition lottery table in step S3103, and then this mode is set. end the processing. Also, if the result of step S3101 is mode B, then in step S3104 a process of setting a mode B table as a transition lottery table for the MY high probability mode is executed, and then this mode setting process ends. Then, a lottery for transition to the MY high-probability mode in each game is performed using the transition lottery table set by these processes.

By doing the above, the value and range of the MY counter that becomes the MY high probability mode will differ for each advantageous section, and assuming that you do not know which mode is set, the value of the MY counter will change. Regardless, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the MY high-probability mode will be set. Further, by setting the mode through mode lottery as described above, it is possible to generate randomness in the value of the MY counter set to the MY high probability mode.

It should be noted that the mode suggesting effect suggesting the set mode may be configured to be performed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, at the start of the AT mode, or at other timings during the advantageous section. In particular, by performing such a mode suggestion effect at a timing before the timing at which the MY high probability mode can be set based on the MY counter, it is possible to arouse expectations for the MY high probability mode.

Incidentally, in the modified example as described above, the MY high-probability mode for watermelon and the MY high-probability mode for cherry can be set redundantly. By doing this, in addition to the situation of staying in each MY high-probability mode, the situation of not staying in any MY high-probability mode, and the situation of both MY high-probability modes overlapping. As a result, it is possible to suitably raise expectations for the increase in the number of AT mode games.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described first embodiment, the lottery for transition to the specific replay navigation mode is performed when BAR replays 1 and 2 or specific replays 1 and 2 are won, and the value of the MY counter is determined by the winning probability and the execution frequency of the transition lottery. Although the configuration is such that it does not participate, it may be configured according to the value of the MY counter. In this modified example, the winning probability of the specific replay navigation lottery (step S1120) when the specific replay 1 and 2 are won is configured to differ according to the value of the MY counter.

Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 74, the winning probability of Suika Navi causing the 11th re-game winning and the winning probability of Cherry Navi causing the 12th re-game winning are equal to the value of the MY counter. It is different depending. For example, as for the winning probability of Suikanavi, winning is easy when the MY counter value is 200-249, and winning is not possible or difficult when the value is 300-399 and 500-599. The winning probability of Cherry Navi is easy to win when the MY counter value is 500 to 549, and is not or difficult to win when the value is 200 to 299 and 400 to 499.

In this way, the appearance rate of game results for which the instruction function is to be improved in the MY high probability mode is also changed according to the value of the MY counter. can be added.

In this case, for example, as in Modification 3, the range of the MY counter set to the MY high probability mode is varied so that the lottery for transition to the MY high probability mode can be performed regardless of the value of the MY counter. By applying this modified example to the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to realize game characteristics such that the MY high probability mode is expected at the MY counter with a high winning probability of the navigation.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the MY counter at the end of the game matches a predetermined specific number, the AT mode is added. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing part of the winning result handling process in this embodiment.

In the winning result handling process in this embodiment, the second process for MY high probability (step S3202) is performed between the number-of-games management process (step S3201) and the post-addition notification process (step S3203). It is different from that of the first embodiment, and other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment. The MY high-probability second process is a process for adding the AT mode based on the value of the MY counter at the end of the game.

<Second processing for MY high probability>
The MY high-probability second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3301, the value of the MY counter is grasped, and the grasped value of the MY counter is input to the SMY counter for calculation provided in the various counter areas 106e. In the following step S3302, a process of subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts of the current game is performed. Then, in step S3303, a process of adding the subtraction result of step S3302 to the SMY counter for calculation is performed. In step S3304, processing for setting the SMY command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The SMY command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the value of the MY counter (SMY counter) that is updated when the current game ends. A process is performed to control the updating of the corresponding display at 65 . The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the SMY command will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S3304 is executed, it is determined whether or not any payout win has been established based on the result of the current game in step S3305. In other words, in step S3305, the result of the current game is either a replay result, a losing result, or any other result, and a negative determination is made that there is a dropout, and the number of medals to be paid out is determined to be negative. is one or more, affirmative determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, processing for increasing the number of AT mode games is performed in steps S3306 to S3317.

In step S3306, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is greater than or equal to the first specific number. Here, as the first specific number, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, and 300 are set in this embodiment. In step S3306, it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the value in order from the smallest value. If it is equal to or greater than the next value, it is further determined whether it is equal to or greater than the next value. More specifically, in step S3306, for example, when the SMY counter is 101, first, it is determined whether it is 50 or more, and since it is 50 or more, it is determined whether it is 100 or more. Since the SMY counter is 100 or more, it is next determined whether it is 150 or more. Since the SMY counter is less than 150, processing is performed to store 100, which was previously affirmatively determined, in the register. If the SMY counter is smaller than any first specific number, that is, if the SMY counter is less than 50, a negative determination is made in step S3306.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the corresponding first specific number flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, in the present embodiment, a 50 flag corresponding to 50 as the first specific number, a 100 flag corresponding to 100 as the first specific number, and a first First specific number flags are provided, such as 150 flags corresponding to 150 as the specific number, and so on. Each time the SMY counter exceeds the first specific number, the first specific number flag corresponding to the exceeded first specific number is set (step S3308). Therefore, step S3307 is a process of determining whether or not the corresponding first specific flag is set, and determining whether or not the first specific number, which has not been exceeded so far, has been reached (exceeded).

If a negative determination is made in step S3307, the corresponding first specific number flag is set in step S3308. That is, when the SMY counter is 101, the 50 flag is set, but if the 100 flag is not set (step S3307: YES), the 100 flag is set (step S3308).

Thereafter, in step S3309, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to the specific number (100 in the above example) that triggered the affirmative determination in step S3306 (negative determination in step S3307) in this process. . If the numbers are equal, in step S3310, an additional lottery process for a specific number is executed. The additional lottery process for a specific number is an additional lottery process that is performed when the MY counter (SMY counter) reaches exactly the specific number at the end of the game, and is a process for changing the instruction function based on the value of the MY counter. corresponds to In the specific number addition lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an addition lottery using a specific number addition lottery table shown in FIG. 77 and a lottery counter. In this embodiment, the additional winning rate when the value of the MY counter is exactly the first specific number is uniformly 50%, and the additional game number at the time of winning is exactly the first specific number. It varies according to the type of number. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, the setting is such that the larger the first specific number, the larger the number of games that can be added.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the result of the specific number addition lottery process in step S3310 is a winning result, and if the lottery is won, AT mode addition processing is executed in step S3312. The processing of step S3312 is the same as the processing of steps S1006 to S1014. Processing for display is performed respectively.

If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S3306, S3309, and S3311, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3307, or if the process of step S3312 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is greater than or equal to the second specific number. Here, 77, 111, 222, and 333 are set as the second specific number in this embodiment. In step S3313, similarly to step S3316, it is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the value in order from the smallest value. If it is equal to or greater than the next value, it is further determined whether it is equal to or greater than the next value. More specifically, in step S3313, for example, when the SMY counter is 113, it is first determined whether it is 50 or more, and since it is 77 or more, it is determined whether it is 111 or more. Since the SMY counter is 111 or more, it is next determined whether it is 222 or more. Since the SMY counter is less than 222, a process of storing 111, which was previously affirmatively determined, in the register is performed. If the SMY counter is smaller than any of the second specific numbers, that is, if the SMY counter is less than 77, a negative determination is made in step S3313.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3313, it is determined in step S3314 whether or not the corresponding second specific number flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, in the present embodiment, a 77 flag corresponding to 77 as the second specific number, a 111 flag corresponding to 111 as the second specific number, and a second A second specific number flag is provided, such as a 333 flag corresponding to 333 as the specific number. Each time the SMY counter exceeds the second specific number, the second specific number flag corresponding to the exceeded second specific number is set (step S3315). Therefore, step S3314 is a process of determining whether or not the corresponding second excess flag is set, and determining whether or not a second specific number that has not been exceeded has been reached (exceeded).

If a negative determination is made in step S3314, the corresponding second specific number flag is set in step S3315. That is, when the SMY counter is 113, although the 77 flag is set, if the 111 flag is not set (step S3314: YES), the process of setting the 111 flag is performed (step S3315).

Thereafter, in step S3316, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to the specific number (111 in the above example) that triggered the affirmative determination in step S3313 (negative determination in step S3314) in this process. . If they are equal, in step S3317 AT mode add-on processing is executed. The processing of step S3317 is also the same as the processing of steps S1006 to S1014. After grasping the number of additional games from the table in FIG. Display processing is performed depending on whether or not.

If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S3305, S3313, and S3316, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3314, or after the processing of step S3317 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3318, and the SMY counter is cleared to 0. After that, the second processing for MY high probability ends.

That is, in the MY high-probability second process, when the MY counter (SMY counter) reaches exactly the first specific number or the second specific number, a process for adding AT mode is performed. Then, if the first specific number or the second specific number is exceeded without being perfect, it is assumed that the MY counter decreases from there and falls below the exceeded first specific number or second specific number. However, with respect to the first specific number and the second specific number, even if the MY counter becomes perfect, no additional processing is performed. In other words, with respect to the first specific number and the second specific number, the chance to make the MY counter exactly the same is limited to one time, and more careful adjustment of the number of cards is required.

By the way, the reason why the MY high-probability second process is not performed in the section display second process, but in the winning result handling process is that if the MY counter reaches a specific number at the end of the AT mode game, the addition will not be possible. This is because, if this occurs, in the second section display process, the end process of the AT mode has already been performed, so a contradiction for presentation may occur.

<Processing for SMY command>
Next, the SMY command handling process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The SMY command handling process is, for example, a process executed in other processes (step S2206) in the effect setting process (FIG. 52) at all stops.

In step S3401, based on the received SMY command, the value of the SMY counter (MY counter) at the end of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S3402, the display MY counter image MYP displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated. For example, as shown in FIG. 79A, the display MY counter image MYP is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the upper right of the screen) in the auxiliary display section 65. The current MY counter value, that is, the medal increase in the advantageous section A number or the like indicates a value corresponding to the number.

In the subsequent step S3403, a process of ascertaining a specific number that is larger and closest (smaller) than the SMY counter ascertained in step S3401 is executed. For example, if the current SMY counter is 42, the specific number that is larger and closest to the SMY counter is 50 as the first specific number. Also, for example, if the current SMY counter is 202, the specific number that is larger and closest to the SMY counter is 222 as the second specific number.

In step S3404, a process of ascertaining the difference between the specific number ascertained in step S3403 and the current SMY counter is performed. For example, if the SMY counter is 42, the difference from 50 as the first specific number is 8, and if the SMY counter is 202, the difference from 222 as the second specific number is 20.

In step S3405, it is determined whether or not the difference from the specific number ascertained in step S3404 is equal to or greater than the number of increments of two minor wins, which is the maximum payout number in the 3-bet game. That is, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination with the maximum number of payouts in the 3-bet game is the first small winning combination that pays out 9 coins, and the increased number for the second small winning combination is 12 coins (( 9 sheets - 3 sheets) x 2 times = 12 sheets). That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the difference from the specific number is 12 or more. If the number is 12 or more, the SMY command handling process is terminated.

If the number is less than 12, then in step S3406, the notification for adjustment is executed, and then the SMY command handling process is terminated. In the notification for adjustment, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the closest specific number to be targeted is displayed, and if the MY counter (MY counter image MYP for display) is exactly the specific number, the player A display suggesting that it will be advantageous (for example, (as a balloon display pointing to the display MY counter image MYP, a display saying "(Specific number) perfect chance!") is performed.) For example, SMY as described above. If the counter is 42, the notification for adjustment corresponding to 50 as the first specific number is performed (FIG. 79(b)).

In this case, it is possible to grasp the current MY counter value and the value of the specific number that should be perfect, so it is possible to clearly grasp how many more cards will be perfect. Then, in the above example, the subsequent game is played so as to increase the remaining 8 cards. For example, if the push-order bell is won in two games in a row and the first minor winning combination is established in both games, the MY counter will not be exactly 50 because 6 cards + 6 cards will result in an increase of 12 cards. In this case, for example, it is possible to adjust the number of cards as follows after winning the 1st minor role when the bell is won in the first push order, and after changing the situation from the remaining 8 cards to the remaining 2 cards. is. That is, when the second push order bell is won, by establishing the 2nd minor role winning to the 26th minor role winning instead of the 1st minor role winning, the increase in medals is suppressed (from the remaining 8 situations above) 2), and the state of close to the specific number is maintained until a small winning combination that causes an increase of 2 cards (for example, the 29th small winning combination, see FIG. 10) is established.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MY counter reaches a predetermined specific number, the AT mode is added and the instruction function (AT mode continuation number) changes. By doing so, not only the game of simply increasing the MY counter and aiming at acquiring many medals, but also the increasing number of medals (MY counter) is set so that the lottery result of the number of payouts that is exactly the specified number is obtained. A game is added to improve the interest of the game.

In the AT mode of a 3-bet game, an increase in medals can be expected. The game results that can be won when the bell is won are the 1st small win with 9 coins paid out, and the 2nd to 26th small wins with 3 coins paid out. There is a problem, and medals will not increase unless the first minor winning combination is established. Also, for example, when the strong watermelon is won, if the 30th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination is established, 5 medals will be paid out, resulting in an increase of 2 medals, but the 30th minor winning combination and the 41st minor winning combination will be missed. If so, no increase in medals will occur (three medals will decrease). Then, for example, when a strong cherry is won, if the 28th minor winning combination is established, two medals are paid out and one medal is decreased. In other words, when the notification for adjustment is performed as described above, it is possible to adjust the MY counter so that in most cases, the MY counter is exactly the specified number, depending on the combination of these results.

On the other hand, for example, in FIG. 79(b), when the first minor win is established in the next game, the remaining two medals are required to increase the MY counter to exactly 50. The case where two medals are added in the game is the case where a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc. are won (winning about 1/160), and the corresponding minor role winning is established. 2 is not won, but the push-order bell is won, the state of remaining 2 cards is maintained, or if a failure occurs, the state of remaining 5 cards is reached. When you have 5 medals remaining, in order to set the MY counter to the specified number, first decrease the number of medals you have by 3 due to missing medals, etc., return to the state of 8 medals remaining, and then follow the above procedure (increase 6 medals). → 2 sheets increase) is the main pattern.

Then, if the MY counter is exactly 50 in less than 100 games, the probability of adding winning is 50%, and the average number of games to be added is 50 (Fig. 77). It is preferable for the player, and if the number of games more than 100 games is required, it is preferable to exceed the MY counter without aiming for exactly 50 games. In this way, the player selects whether or not to play a game in which the specific number of games is exactly performed based on the relationship between the difficulty of making the specific number of games exactly and the profit (additional number of games) when the specific number of games is exactly achieved. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to realize unprecedented interesting game characteristics.

Moreover, for example, even if it takes an average of 100 games to set the MY counter to a specific number, if the remaining number of AT mode games is less than 100 games, the AT mode will not be able to set the MY counter to a specific number. ends. Therefore, it is possible to challenge the game by considering not only the degree of difficulty and the benefit of setting the specific number as described above, but also the number of remaining games, thereby making the game more interesting.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the first specific number and the second specific number differ depending on the mode set at the start of the advantageous section. That is, this modification corresponds to modification 3 in the first embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the mode setting process at the start of the advantageous section in this modified example.

In step S3501, mode lottery processing is performed. In this modification, the mode A table shown in FIG. A mode B is set in which processing for adding a specific number is performed. The mode A table and the mode B table are set such that the first specific number and the second specific number are different. In the mode lottery process, which mode is to be set is determined by lottery based on the mode lottery table shown in FIG. In the mode lottery table, the mode to be selected differs depending on the setting value. Mode A is likely to be selected for odd number settings of settings 1, 3 and 5, and mode B is likely to be selected for even number settings of settings 2, 4 and 6. ing.

In step S3501, the mode lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and which mode is to be set is determined by lottery based on the current setting value and the lottery counter. In the following step S3502, it is determined whether or not the result of step S3501 is mode A. If it is mode A, in step S3503 each specific number referred to in the second processing for MY high probability in this advantageous section are set as based on the Mode A table. After that, in step S3504, a mode A command indicating that mode A has been set is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this mode setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3502 that the mode is B, in step S3505 each specific number referred to in the MY high-probability second processing in the current advantageous section is based on the mode B table. set. After that, in step S3506, a mode B command indicating that mode B has been set is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this mode setting process ends.

As described above, information indicating that mode A or mode B has been set can be grasped by the display control device 81 by each command. becomes possible.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, it may be possible to display which mode it is based on the operation of the effect switch 66 or the like. That is, FIG. 83(a) shows that it is mode A, and FIG. 83(b) shows that it is mode B. Based on the operation of the production switch 66, the corresponding specific number shows an example that appears in the It should be noted that the display of FIG. 83(a) or FIG. 83(b) may be performed when some condition is satisfied. By setting a condition that is likely to be satisfied as a condition that enables the above display, a balance with the notification for adjustment is ensured.

In this way, since the type of specific number differs for each advantageous section, it is possible to diversify games in which the MY counter is set to a specific number, and the set value can be predicted depending on which mode is set. Since the game is added, it becomes possible to add a new added value to the game using the MY counter and the specific number.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, in a game in which the MY counter is a specific number, a result corresponding to the difference between the MY counter and the specific number is displayed. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing SMY command handling processing in this modified example.

The processing in steps S3601 to S3605 is the same as the processing in steps S3401 to S3405 described above, and the MY counter image MYP for display is updated and the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is grasped. , it is determined whether or not the difference is 12 or more.

If the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is less than 12 in step S3605, the process advances to step S3606 to determine whether or not there is a result of the lottery result that will increase the number of medals corresponding to the difference. . More specifically, in the present embodiment, in the 3-bet game, there are two game results that increase the number of medals: an increase of 6 medals (payout of 9 medals) and an increase of 2 medals (payout of 5 medals). , the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is 6 or 2, the determination is affirmative. If the number of sheets is not 6 or 2, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that adjustment notification is performed in step S3607, and then the SMY command handling process is terminated. If the number is 6 or 2, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S3608 so that small combination adjustment notification is performed, and then the SMY command handling process is terminated.

In the small combination corresponding adjustment notification, for example, as shown in FIG. When there are 6 or 2, as shown in FIG. 85(b), it is notified that the specific number is exactly achieved by winning a prize corresponding to the difference. In the figure, in a situation where the MY counter is 44, and the difference from the specific number of 50 is 6, a push-order bell winning (first minor role winning) that causes an increase of 6 medals is established. 50.

By performing the notification for adjustment corresponding to the small combination in this way, the player can intuitively grasp which result will make it possible to set the MY counter to a specific number, and the MY counter can be set to a specific number. can be made easier to play a game with a specific number of

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the difference between the MY counter and the specific number is reported as a combination of multiple game results. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing SMY command handling processing in this modified example.

The processing of steps S3701 to S3705 is the same as the processing of steps S3401 to S3405, and the processing of updating the MY counter image MYP for display and grasping the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is performed. In S3705, it is determined whether or not the difference is 12 or more.

If the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is less than 12 in step S3705, the flow advances to step S3706 to perform processing for grasping the result combination corresponding to the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number. Here, as shown in FIG. 87, the various table storage area 182a in this modification stores a result combination table that stores the correspondence between the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number and the combination of the game results. ing. In the result combination table, for example, if the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is 1, the result combination necessary to increase the MY counter by 1 is a small win ( 29th small role, 30th small role, etc.) is established (reduced by one), and in the second game, a small role corresponding to a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon (27th small role, 28th small role, etc.) It is memorized that a specific number is exactly obtained by winning a prize (increase by two cards). Also, if the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is 9, the number of medals is reduced by the number of bets (reduced by 3) as a result of losing or missing in the 1st game, and pushed to the 2nd and 3rd games. It is stored that the specific number is exactly achieved by establishing a winning of a small winning combination (first small winning combination) corresponding to the order bell (increase by 12 coins).

In the result combination table, the result combination corresponding to the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number stores a plurality of combination patterns for the value of 1, an example of which is shown in the drawing.

In step S3706, the result combination table is acquired, the result combination corresponding to the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is grasped, and one result combination is randomly selected from a plurality of result combinations by lottery or the like. In addition, it is good also as a structure which is easy to select the combination which is easy to be materialized as a result combination. After that, in step S3707, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the adjustment notification for the result is performed, and then the SMY command handling process is terminated.

In the result corresponding adjustment notification, for example, as shown in FIG. It is shown that when a small winning combination or a 30th small winning combination occurs once, the MY counter becomes exactly 77 as a specific number (second specific number). By doing so, it is possible to intuitively understand what kind of result will result in a specific number as a result of a plurality of games. It is possible to entertain easily without forcing complicated calculations.

In this case, since the relationship between the difference and the result combination is stored in advance in the display control device 81 as a result combination table, after calculating the difference, the combination of results corresponding to the difference can be displayed on the spot. It is possible to enjoy the above game while avoiding an increase in the processing load without the need for calculation.

Since the result combination table stores the results of each game from the first game to the third game, the order of the results may also be notified in the notification for adjustment corresponding to the result. In this case, it is also possible to notify whether or not additional processing is performed when a specific number is obtained depending on the order, even for the same combination of results. That is, as shown in FIGS. 88(b1) and 88(b2), for example, when the difference between the MY counter and the specific number is 9, the winning order of the bell (first minor winning combination) is twice, and the losing One time is exactly the specified number. In this case, if the first failure occurs before the second push order bell (Fig. 88(b1)), the MY counter will be exactly the specified number, and additional processing will be performed. If it occurs after winning two times (FIG. 88(b2)), once the MY counter exceeds the specific number, the MY counter decreases to just the specific number. Not done. Therefore, by notifying even the order of the results, it is possible to avoid contradiction between the content of the notification and the presence or absence of additional processing.

Here, as a result of each game, the number of medals increased or decreased at the time of winning is set to an odd number (loss, strong cherry, etc.), so in the game where the above specific number is exactly, the difference is an odd number. There is also room for a specific number of . Therefore, it is possible to favorably play a game in which the MY counter is just a specific number.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, when there are a plurality of specific numbers close to the current MY counter, the notification for adjustment corresponding to each specific number is performed. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing SMY command handling processing in this modification.

The processing of steps S3801 to S3805 is the same as the processing of steps S3401 to S3405, and the processing of updating the MY counter image MYP for display and grasping the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is performed. In S3805, it is determined whether or not the difference is 12 or more.

If the difference between the SMY counter and the specific number is less than 12 in step S3805, the process advances to step S3806 to perform processing to grasp the next closest specific number to the specific number grasped in step S3803. That is, for example, if the current SMY counter is 121 and the specific number ascertained in step S3803 is 123 (second specific number) in the mode B table of FIG. 130 (first specific number) is grasped as the number. Then, in step S3807, a process of ascertaining the difference between the specific number ascertained in step S3806 and the SMY counter is performed. In the following step S3808, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S3806 is 12 or more (whether or not the number of increments is equal to or more than two small wins, which is the maximum increment). If the number is 12 or more, that is, if the difference from the current MY counter is less than 12, the specific number is 1. In step S3809, notification for adjustment is executed, and then this SMY command handling process is executed. finish.

If it is less than 12 in step S3808, that is, if there are two specific numbers with a difference from the current MY counter of less than 12, in step S3810 the difference from each specific number is dealt with. After executing the notification for adjustment, this SMY command handling process is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the current MY counter is 121, the second specific number is 123, and the addition processing is performed, and the first specific number is 130. If the MY counter is set to 123 and the MY counter is set to 123, the MY counter is adjusted to 123 and the MY counter is set to 123. The notification for adjustment that it is advantageous to reach 130 is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 respectively. By doing so, in a game in which the MY counter is set to a specific number, it is possible to adjust which specific number to use while viewing the game result, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the difference in the degree of advantage between when the MY counter is exactly set to the first specific number and when it is set to exactly the second specific number is due to the notification for adjustment of each of the first specific number and the second specific number. Based on this, it is also possible to select which specific number to use, and the amusement of the game is dramatically improved.

In this case, as in Modification 2 and Modification 3, the notification for adjustment corresponding to the minor combination and the notification for adjustment corresponding to the result may be performed as notification for adjustment (FIG. 90(b)). In this way, it becomes possible for the player to intuitively understand what kind of result will be exactly the specific number for each specific number, and it is possible to enjoy these games more easily. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, additional processing is performed according to the game result when the MY counter exceeds a specific number. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the second processing for MY high probability in this embodiment. As already explained, the MY high-probability second process is performed as one of the winning result handling processes, and is one process that is performed at the end of the game.

The processing from step S3901 to step S3905 is the same as the processing from step S3301 to step S3305, and after inputting the value of the MY counter of the previous game to the SMY counter, the increase/decrease of the number of sheets of the current game is reflected in the SMY counter. processing, etc.

In step S3906, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to or greater than each of the first specific numbers, and in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the corresponding first specific number flag has already been set. The processing in steps S3906 and S3907 is the same as the processing in steps S3306 and S3307 described above. In step S3908, the corresponding first specific number flag is set as in step S3308.

In the subsequent step S3909, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is performed. The game result here includes the lottery result in the lottery process of the game and whether or not the lottery result is won. For example, if the lottery result of the current game is that the bell is won in the order of pressing, in step S3909, in addition to the information that the bell has been won in the order of pressing, any of the 1st to 26th minor winnings has been established. Information about the event and information about what was left out.

Then, in step S3910, a first specific number addition lottery process is performed. In the first specific number addition lottery process, after obtaining the specific number addition lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform the AT mode addition. As shown in FIG. 92, the additional lottery table for the specific number in this embodiment includes the lottery result of this game, whether or not there is a prize, and the type of the excess specific number (first specific number/second specific number). , and are set so that the additional winning rate is different. For example, when the first specific number is exceeded, the additional winning probability for the strong watermelon is 80% when the corresponding small winning combination is won, while the weak watermelon has an additional winning probability of 60 when the corresponding small winning combination is won. %, and even if the same first specific number is exceeded, the additional winning rate differs depending on the game result when the same first specific number is exceeded. In addition, in the extra lottery table for specific numbers, an extra winning rate is set for a game result in which the increase/decrease number is 0 or negative (for example, a small winning combination corresponding to a strong cherry or a weak cherry) even if a winning occurs. It has not been. This corresponds to the fact that when the increase/decrease number is 0 or negative, an event exceeding a specific number cannot occur. It is possible to avoid pressure on the allocated storage area.

After the addition lottery process for the first specific number is performed at step S3910, it is determined at step S3911 whether or not the addition winning is performed. The processing of step S3912 is the same as the processing of step S3312 described above. However, in this embodiment, the table for the number of additional games is set so that the number of additional games at the time of additional winning may differ depending on the game result when the same specific number is exceeded (Fig. 92), in step S3912, after grasping the number of additional games corresponding to the game result, additional processing is performed. As shown in FIG. 92, for example, if the game result when the first specific number is exceeded is Strong Watermelon, the average number of additional games is 70 games, whereas even if the same first specific number is exceeded, the average number of games added is 70 games. When the game result at the time of excess is the push order bell, the average number of additional games is 15 games, which is less than in the case of strong watermelon.

If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3911, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, or after executing the processing of step S3912, the process proceeds to step S3913. In step S3913, it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to or greater than each second specific number, and in step S3914, it is determined whether or not the corresponding second specific number flag has already been set. The processing of steps S3913 and S3914 is the same as the processing of steps S3313 and S3314 described above. In step S3915, as in step S3315, the corresponding second specific number flag is set.

In the subsequent step S3916, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is performed. Such processing corresponds to the processing of step S3909. Then, in step S3917, a second specific number addition lottery process is performed. Also in the second specific number addition lottery process, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform an addition lottery for the AT mode after acquiring the addition lottery table for the specific number stored in the various table storage area 105a. In this embodiment, even if the game result is the same, the additional winning rate and the number of additional games are set to be different between when the first specific number is exceeded and when the second specific number is exceeded. The second specific number is set so that the odds of winning are higher than the specific number, and the number of games to be added is increased (FIG. 92). Then, in step S3918, it is determined whether or not it is an additional winning, and if it is an additional winning, a process for adding is performed in step S3919. The processing of step S3919 is the same as that of step S3917, and the fact that the number of additional games differs according to the game result is as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S3905, step S3913 or step S3918, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3914, or after the processing of step S3919 is executed, the SMY counter is cleared to 0 in step S3920, and then the MY End the high-probability second processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the MY counter exceeds the value of the AT mode, the instruction function (the number of continuations of the AT mode) is changed. Since the mode of change (additional winning rate and the number of additional games) is different, in the game using the MY counter and the specific number, there is a choice such as which game result will exceed the specific number. significantly improved.

For example, if the game result when the MY counter exceeds a specific number is a small winning combination corresponding to a strong watermelon, the winning probability is higher than a small winning combination corresponding to the pushing order bell. Furthermore, since the number of additional games at the time of winning tends to increase (Fig. 92), in a situation where the MY counter is close to a specific number, it is possible to avoid winning a small winning combination corresponding to the pushing order bell, A game waiting for a game that can result in a game with a large profit is realized.

However, due to the relationship between the number of games required to wait for overtime and the number of additional games when overtime is exceeded, for example, if waiting for strong watermelon, if the game result corresponding to strong watermelon is exceeded in less than 70 games, the player There is a profit (the number of games to be added is greater than the number of games required to exceed the number of games), but if the number of games is 70 or more, it is disadvantageous to the player (the number of games required to exceed the number of games is greater than the number of games to be added). , and waiting for the desired result to be achieved at the time of overrun while taking these into consideration.

In addition, when waiting for overtime, it is necessary to take into account the number of remaining games in AT mode. It is also possible to choose between two extremes, such as exceeding a specific number by winning a small win in the order bell, or waiting for the game result to increase the profit when the excess is over if it will end soon anyway. Regardless of which one is selected, it is possible to have a game property that allows the user to fully enjoy the fun of the game.

Incidentally, as in this embodiment, when the specific number is exceeded, the value of the MY counter should exceed the specific number, including the case where the MY counter is exactly the specific number. In other words, as in the second embodiment, in a game in which the MY counter is set to exactly a specific number, a configuration in which an addition is made according to the game result when the MY counter reaches the specific number is also included in the technical scope of the present embodiment. be In this case, when the MY counter exceeds the specified number, there are cases where the specified number is exact, and cases where the MY counter exceeds the specified number. If the additional winning probability is increased, the number of additional games is increased), it is possible to maintain a balance between the difficulty of making the specific number exactly and the profit to be given.

Furthermore, when the MY counter exceeds the specific number, the benefit to be given may be varied according to the difference between the specific number and the MY counter. For example, when the MY counter exceeds a specific number and the difference between the MY counter and the specific number is the first number (3), the additional winning probability is set as the first probability, and the MY counter exceeds the specific number. If the difference between the MY counter and the specific number is a second number (1) that is smaller than the first number, the additional winning probability may be set to a second probability higher than the first probability. . By doing so, it is possible to secure superiority when a specific number is exceeded in a small winning combination with a small number of payouts, or when the specific number is exceeded at once in a situation where the difference between the specific number and the MY counter is large. It is also possible to create game characteristics in anticipation of it.

<Modification>
In the above-described third embodiment, an addition is made based on the game result of the game exceeding the specific number, but in this modified example, an addition is made based on the lottery result of the game following the game exceeding the specific number. I do. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the second process for MY high probability in this modification.

The processing of steps S4001 to S4005 is the same as the processing of steps S3901 to S3905. Also, the processing in step S4006 is the same as the processing in step S3906, and it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to or greater than each of the first specific numbers.

In step S4007, it is determined whether or not the first specified number completed flag corresponding to the first specified number determined in step S4006 is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first specific number completion flag is provided according to the type of the first specific number. A 100-completed flag, a 150-completed flag, a 200-completed flag, a 250-completed flag, and a 300-completed flag are provided. In step S4007, as the first specific number completed flag corresponding to the first specific number used as the determination target in step S4006, for example, when it is determined that the SMY counter has exceeded 100 in step S4006, a 100 completed flag is displayed. is set. If not set, in step S4008, a process of setting the corresponding first specific number flag (the 100 flag in the above example) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4006, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, or after the processing of step S4008 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4009. The processing in step S4009 is the same as the processing in step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the SMY counter is equal to or greater than each of the second specific numbers.

In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the second specified number completed flag corresponding to the second specified number determined in step S4009 is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second specific number completion flag is provided according to the type of the second specific number. A 222 completed flag and a 333 completed flag are provided. In step S4010, for example, if it is determined that the SMY counter has exceeded 111 in step S4009, the 111 completed flag is used as the second specified number completed flag corresponding to the second specified number used as the determination target in step S4009. is set. If not set, in step S4011, a process of setting a corresponding second specific number flag (111 flag in the above example) is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4005 or S4009, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4010, or after the processing of step S4011 is executed, the process advances to step S4012 to clear the SMY counter to 0 and End the second process for probability.

In the lottery result correspondence process in this modified example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 94, after the AT addition process, the specific MY addition process (step S4109) is performed. The other processes (steps S4101 to S4108) are the same as steps S701 to S708.

In the specific MY addition processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not any of the various first specific number flags or the various second specific number flags is set. If none of the specific number flags is set, the specific MY addition process is terminated. If any specific number flags are set, flow proceeds to step S4202.

In step S4202, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is performed. That is, the process of step S4202 is for grasping the result of the lottery process of the current game, and since the presence or absence of winning is an event after this process, it is not grasped in this process. Then, in step S4203, an additional lottery process for a specific number is performed. In the addition lottery process for the specific number, after acquiring the addition lottery table for the specific number stored in the various table storage area 105a, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to add the AT mode.

As shown in FIG. 96, the additional lottery table for the specific number in this modification has an additional winning rate depending on the lottery result of the game and the type of the excess specific number (first specific number/second specific number). configured differently. As described above, in this modified example, an additional lottery is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery process of the game. In addition, in FIG. 96, for comparison with FIG. 92, the presence or absence of winning and the additional winning rate depending on the winning small combination are displayed, but the additional winning rate is displayed as if there is no difference in both. As described above, since this is the lottery result of the game following the game in which the specified number has been exceeded, the increase/decrease in the number of games in this game does not affect the lottery results for which the additional lottery is applied. overwhelmingly large in comparison.

In step S4203, an additional lottery is performed using the above-mentioned additional lottery table for the specific number, the lottery result of the current game, and the lottery counter. Then, in step S4204, processing for clearing the corresponding specific number flag is performed. Then, in step S4205, processing for setting the corresponding specified number completed flag is executed. By clearing the specific number flag in step S4204, the additional lottery process for the specific number in step S4203 is not performed after the next game. Once the MY counter exceeds a specific number, even if the MY counter decreases and falls below the specific number, even if the specific number is exceeded again, it will not be subject to the specific MY addition processing. becomes possible.

In step S4206, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery in step S4203 has been won. When it is determined that the addition lottery has not been won, the processing for this specific MY addition is ended as it is. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, processing for adding is performed in step S4207. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S3912 and the like. However, in step S4207, the number of additional games shown in FIG. 96 is referred to, and processing for the current additional game is performed. After executing the process of step S4207, the specific MY addition process ends.

As described above, the lottery result of the game following the game in which the MY counter exceeds the specified number is used to perform additional processing. Even a lottery result with a small amount of money can be subject to additional processing. That is, for example, like strong cherries and weak cherries, in addition processing for normal AT, although additions occur with high probability, the number of payouts at the time of winning the corresponding small combination is small, so in the third embodiment In this modified example, even the results excluded from the target of the additional processing can be made the target of the additional processing.

In addition, by using the lottery results, regardless of whether or not the prize was won, additional processing will be performed. It is possible to ensure fairness between a player who can win and a player who cannot win (will miss).

Furthermore, by performing processing for addition using the lottery result, the degree of freedom of the timing of addition notification is overwhelmingly improved compared to the configuration using the game result. That is, in the configuration that uses the game result, since the processing for addition is performed after waiting for the presence or absence of winning, the notification of the addition must be made after the end of the game (after the third reel is stopped). On the other hand, if it is a lottery result, the addition notification can be made before the stop of the first reel, and it is possible to share the addition notification and notification timing in the normal AT addition processing.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the AT mode ends in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can continue for a predetermined number of games thereafter. That is, in the advantageous section, a normal mode or a CZ mode other than the AT mode can intervene between the AT mode and the AT mode. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing part of the number-of-games management process in this embodiment.

That is, when a negative determination is made in step S1308 or step S1314, or after the processing of step S1313 or step S1315 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4301 in this embodiment. In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented in step S4302. Then, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the AT mode flag and the AT notification flag is executed in step S4304. Then, in step S4305, processing for setting an AT end flag is executed. The processes of steps S4301 to S4305 are the same as the processes of steps S1316 to S1320.

After executing the process of step S4305, in step S4306, the process of inputting 100 as a predetermined number to the advantageous section continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous interval continuation counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in which the advantageous interval is held (not ended) after the AT mode ends. can continue.

After executing the process of step S4306, in step S4307, the process of clearing the specific number flag and the specific number completed flag is executed. That is, the information that the MY counter once exceeded a specific number is cleared when the AT mode ends.

After that, in step S4308, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S4301 or step S4303, or if the process of step S4308 has been executed, the process advances to step S1322.

Next, the section display second processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, the processing of steps S4401 to S4409 is the same as the processing of steps S1501 to S1509, and includes update processing for the number of games in the advantageous section AG, update processing for the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY, upper limit number of games, and upper limit number of games. In addition to performing processing for grasping in advance that the increase number will be reached, when the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is reached, the advantageous section is ended and various data are initialized.

If it is determined in step S4410 that neither the upper limit number of games nor the upper limit increase number is reached, but neither the CZ mode flag nor the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, the AT end flag is reached in step S4411. is set, and if the AT end flag is not set, the second section display process is terminated. If the AT end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4412.

In step S4412, a process of subtracting 1 from the advantageous section continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S4413, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section continuation counter has become zero. If it becomes 0, the process advances to steps S4407 to S4409 to perform processing for ending the advantageous section. If the advantageous section continuation counter is not 0, the second section display processing is terminated.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, when this embodiment is applied to the second embodiment, in the specific MY high-probability process performed in the MY update process, first, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. , and under the condition that the MY counter is in the AT mode, a process for addition is performed when the MY counter reaches exactly the specified number, and a process for setting a specified number flag is performed when the specified number is exceeded. Further, even when this embodiment is applied to the third embodiment, in the specific MY high-probability second process performed in the winning result handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. , and under the condition that the MY counter exceeds a specific number, a process for setting a specific number flag is performed when the MY counter exceeds the specific number. That is, after the AT mode ends, the specific number flag is not set even if the MY counter reaches the specific number or exceeds the specific number in the normal mode or CZ mode during the advantageous section. In other words, after the specific number flag is cleared at the end of the AT mode, the event of setting the specific number flag again based on the fact that the MY counter exceeds the specific number is avoided.

The game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the advantageous section starts at the timing of t31 and the AT mode starts at the timing of t32, the MY counter starts counting. For example, when the MY counter reaches near a predetermined specific number at the timing of t33, the state is slightly less than the specific number so that the specific number is exact or the game result when the specific number is exceeded is the desired result. A game of waiting while maintaining the current state of the medals held is performed. Then, the MY counter exceeds a predetermined specific number at the timing of t34. In the figure, the increase/decrease of medals (MY counter) is the same at t33 and t34, but actually t33 is slightly less than t34. When the specified number is exceeded at t34, it is not possible to match the specified number exactly, or the extra lottery when the specified number is exceeded shows a case where the winning is not won.After that, at the timing of t35, AT mode. ends.

When the AT mode ends at the timing of t35, the MY counter continues counting because the advantageous section does not end in this embodiment. On the other hand, at the timing of t35, the specific number flag is cleared. However, if the AT mode ends at the timing of t35 and the AT mode continues at the timing of t36 soon after, the number of medals (MY counter) at the timing of t36 will be the predetermined specific number that exceeded at the timing of t34. , and in the AT mode started at the timing of t36, it is difficult to add a predetermined specific number.

At timing t43, the number approaches the predetermined specific number, and when the predetermined specific number is exceeded at timing t44, the AT mode ends at timing t45, and then the AT mode starts at timing t46. In this case, the number of medals (MY counter) at the timing of t46 is below the predetermined specific number exceeded at the timing of t44. Then, in the AT mode started at the timing of t46, at the timing of t47, the number becomes close to the predetermined specific number, and at the timing of t48, the predetermined specific number is exactly reached, or depending on the game result when the predetermined specific number is exceeded. Additional surcharges can occur.

In this way, after the addition using the relationship between the MY counter and the specific number is performed during the AT mode, the AT mode is temporarily terminated, the MY counter is decreased, and when the MY counter falls below the specific number, the AT mode is resumed. , addition can be made when the MY counter reaches or exceeds the specific number. Therefore, even if there is a state in which the number of medals can be reduced between the AT mode and the AT mode, the reduction of the number of medals can be used to re-challenge using the relationship with the specific number. It is possible to eliminate the player's sense of loss due to the decrease in the number of medals held.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) Based on the MY counter, the additional winning probability is increased, and the additional lottery is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the instruction function is lowered, such as by lowering the number or by making it difficult or impossible to perform an additional lottery. For example, in a specific situation where the MY counter is between a first specific number and a second specific number, the additional winning probability may be low, and the specific situation should be avoided as much as possible before such a specific situation. As shown in the figure, when the pushing order bell is won, 3 coins are paid out instead of 9 coins. Further, after the specific situation is reached, an effect may be provided to the effect that it is advantageous to get out of the specific situation at an early stage. Furthermore, based on the result of the game when the MY counter reaches a specific number or exceeds the specific number (the result of the game after exceeding the specific number), the additional lottery is made difficult or the additional lottery is performed. For example, even if the result of the game when it reaches a specific number or when it exceeds is normal, even if it is easy to perform an additional lottery (such as a strong cherry), it is more likely than usual The additional lottery may be made difficult or the additional lottery may not be performed. Moreover, although an additional lottery is performed, the number of additional games at the time of winning may be reduced.

(2) Based on the MY counter, the winning probability of the additional lottery and the presence or absence of the additional lottery are changed, so that the number of continuations of the AT mode as an instruction function is changed. For example, based on the MY counter, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery and the presence or absence of the transition lottery change, or the winning probability of the transition lottery to the additional special zone and the presence or absence of the transition lottery change. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In addition, in a configuration in which a so-called ceiling is provided such that if a predetermined number of games are played without winning the AT mode, pseudo bonus, special zone, etc., the AT mode, pseudo bonus, special zone, etc. are forcibly set. may be configured such that its ceiling changes based on the MY counter. Furthermore, the trigger event (game lottery result, etc.) that triggers the additional lottery and transition lottery related to the instruction function may be changed. Where the lottery is not performed, an additional lottery is performed in the strong cherry and the normal replay based on the MY counter, or an additional lottery is not performed in the strong cherry, but an additional lottery is performed in the normal replay. good.

(3) Although the instruction function is configured to change based on the MY counter, it may be configured to provide benefits that are advantageous to the player based on the MY counter. As the privilege, for example, an effect suggesting a set value is generated or more likely to occur, or a rare image is displayed or more likely to be displayed. Further, based on the MY counter, events that directly increase or decrease medals, such as an increase in the odds of winning a small winning combination or a bonus, or an increase in the number of payouts when a predetermined result is won, may be used as benefits. In particular, if the MY counter reaches a specific number or exceeds the specific number, a privilege is granted according to the game result. Through a game or the like that adjusts the number of medals, it is possible to achieve a novel game property that breaks away from a game that aims to increase medals.

(4) The MY counter is configured to reflect all information for 1-bet games, 2-bet games, and 3-bet games, but may be configured to not include information for any of the bet games, or only for any of the bet games. The MY counter may be updated according to the information, or the information in the betting game defined in the gaming state may be reflected in the MY counter. More specifically, for example, the number of bets and the number of payouts in a game played with a predetermined number of bets (for example, one bet) are not input to the MY counter, or a predetermined number of bets (three bets) Only the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game played in the CB state are input to the MY counter. In states other than the state, the number of bets and the number of payouts in a game in which three cards are bet may be input to the MY counter.

(5) One prescribed number (specified prescribed number) prescribed according to the gaming state is not limited to the above. For example, a 2-bet game can be played in the BB state, a specific prescribed number of 2 coins may be bet in the BB state, and a specific prescribed number of 3 coins may be bet in states other than the BB state (CB state).

(6) The performance of the MY high-probability mode may differ according to the game result when the MY high-probability mode is set. For example, if the game result when the MY counter exceeds the first specific number and the MY high probability mode is set to strong cherry, the MY high probability mode for cherry is set and the first specific number is exceeded. If the current game result is strong watermelon, the MY high probability mode for watermelon may be set. Further, the MY high probability mode may be set such that the case of exceeding the first specific number with strong cherries is more advantageous than the case of exceeding the first specific number with weak cherries.

(7) Each MY high-probability mode may be implemented by a continuous MY counter. For example, when the MY counter is 200-249, the MY high-probability mode for watermelon is set, and when the MY counter is 250-299, the MY high-probability mode for cherry is set. Further, for example, it is possible to provide a MY high-probability mode for cherries in which the add-on performance when winning a cherry is improved and a MY low-probability mode for cherries in which the add-on performance when winning a cherry is reduced. Then, the MY high-probability mode for cherry and the MY low-probability mode for cherry may be realized by a continuous MY counter.

(8) The first specific number and the second specific number set in the MY high probability mode are not limited to those described above. For example, the value of the MY counter (near 0) immediately after starting the AT mode may be set as the first specific number, and the vicinity of the upper limit increase number (near 2400) of the advantageous interval may be set as the second specific number. Also, the first specific number may be 0 and the second specific number may be 2400 so that the entire MY counter in the advantageous section is within the range of the MY high probability mode. In this case, a case where the entire advantageous section is in the MY high probability mode for cherry and a case where the entire advantageous section is in the MY high probability mode for watermelon are provided. It is good to have the structure which sets which one should be made into an advantageous area.

(9) The difference between the first specific number and the second specific number set in the MY high probability mode is not limited to the above. For example, the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number may be 1 or 2. However, the first specific number and the second specific number so that the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is larger than the difference in the number of increases that occurs when the pushing order bell is won (9 cards - 3 cards = 6 cards) By setting the number, it is possible to generate an event that, when winning the pushing order bell, the second specific number is exceeded in one winning result, while the second specific number is not exceeded in the other winning result. Further, by reducing the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number, it becomes more difficult to maintain the MY high-probability mode, and the playability is improved.

(10) The types of MY high probability modes are not only MY high probability mode for cherries and MY high probability mode for watermelon, but also MY high probability mode for bells that improves performance when winning the push order bell, and MY high probability mode for losing results. Others may be provided, such as the MY high-probability mode for outliers, which improves the performance of adding .

(11) In the MY high probability mode, the target game result is mainly the replay result (11th replay result, 12th replay result), and the winning of the target game result does not affect the MY counter. However, the game results in which winnings affect the MY counter may also be targeted. For example, if a MY high probability mode for bells is provided that targets the order of pushing the bell, an addition may occur based on the winning of the bell in the order of pushing, but if the 1st minor winning combination is established, the MY high probability mode for bells will end. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property such as operating so as to avoid winning the first minor winning combination.

(12) The lottery result in the lottery process of the game is used to perform the additional lottery during the MY high probability mode, but it is also possible to perform the additional lottery during the MY high probability mode based on the winning result of the target. good. For example, in the MY high-probability mode for the bell mentioned above, if the 1st minor role winning is established, an additional lottery will be held on the MY high-probability table, while the 2nd to 26th minor role winnings will be established. If you miss it, the extra lottery will be held on the normal table instead of the MY high probability table. good too.

(13) By outputting a specific pressing order notification command when a winning combination is won, the pressing order notification on the main control unit 101 side and the pressing order notification effect on the display control unit 81 side have different contents. In a situation where a specific pressing order notification command is output, the pressing order notification on the main control device 101 side and the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side may have the same content. That is, for example, when the specific replay 1 is won, if the display control device 81 is caused to perform a pushing order notification effect for winning the 11th replay, which is a cherry replay, the pushing order notification on the main control unit 101 side is also performed in the 11th replay. Notification of the pressing order for winning a game may be performed. When the pressing order bell is won, when the display control device 81 is caused to perform the pressing order notification effect for the second minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination, the pressing order notification on the main control unit 101 side is also performed for the second minor winning combination. It is also possible to notify the pressing order for the winning to the 26th minor combination winning.

(14) Between cherry replay and watermelon play, the watermelon play is superior to the cherry replay in terms of the performance of the instruction function such as the additional winning rate and the number of additional games, but the same level of performance may be used. Cherry replay may be given priority. Regarding the navigation lottery between cherry replay and watermelon play, the cherry replay is prioritized over watermelon play, and the navigation lottery for cherry replay is performed before the navigation lottery for watermelon play, but both navigations are performed at the same time. In this case, the cherry navigator may be more likely to be selected than the watermelon navigator in the lottery table. You may make it

(15) Regarding the lottery for transition to the specific replay navigation mode, if the number of remaining AT mode games is less than the number of continuous navigation modes (30), the lottery for transition is not performed. In this case, if the number of remaining AT mode games is small (the number of continuations of navigation mode when winning the transition lottery is small), it is easier to win the navigation mode transition lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which benefits (suggestion of set values and rare images) different from those in the navigation mode are given or are likely to be given as much as the number is smaller.

(16) Regarding the specific number of the MY counter, the larger the specific number, the larger the setting difference. However, the smaller the specific number, the larger the setting difference. More specifically, for example, regarding the MY high probability mode, the specific number for starting (first specific number) may be configured to have a setting difference from the specific number for ending (second specific number). In the configuration in which the MY high-probability mode is set, the MY high-probability mode that is set earlier may have a setting difference in the specific number than the MY high-probability mode that is set later. .

(17) When the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the MY high probability mode is not set or is difficult to be set, or the processing for addition based on the MY counter (the specific number is exactly (additional processing when the specified number is exceeded) may be configured so that it is not performed or is difficult to be performed.

In addition, when the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the MY high probability mode is set to be more disadvantageous than usual (the probability of additional winning at the time of winning the target result is low, the number of additional games is small). or a configuration that is easy to set, and in the processing for addition based on the MY counter (processing for addition when the specific number is exact or exceeds the specific number), processing for addition that is more disadvantageous than usual (additional winning A low probability, a small number of additional games, etc.) may be performed or may be configured to be easily performed.

(18) If the difference between the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the upper limit number of games (1500) is less than a predetermined number, or if the difference between the MY counter and the upper limit increase number (2400) is less than a predetermined number, MY high Probability mode is not set or is difficult to be set, and additional processing based on the MY counter (additional processing when the specific number is exactly or exceeds the specific number) is not performed or is difficult to be performed. You can

Also, if the difference between the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the upper limit number of games (1500) is less than a predetermined number, or if the difference between the MY counter and the upper limit increase number (2400) is less than a predetermined number, It is set to disadvantageous MY high probability mode (low probability of winning when the target result is won, the number of games to be added is small), or a configuration that is easy to set, or processing for addition based on the MY counter (a specific number is perfect) In addition processing when exceeding a specific number), additional processing that is more disadvantageous than usual (lower winning probability, less number of additional games) is performed or configured to be easily performed good too.

(19) When the MY counter reaches a specific number or when the MY counter exceeds a specific number, a process for changing the instruction function such as an addition process is performed in accordance with the game result. It is good also as a structure where the game state of is added. For example, if the game state is normal game state when the MY counter reaches a specific number, processing for changing the instruction function such as additional processing is performed, which is more advantageous than the third RT state. It may be configured to be Also, for example, even if the game result is the same when the MY counter exceeds a specific number, the BB state is more advantageous than the 3rd RT state. may be configured such that a process for changing is performed. Regarding the process of changing the instruction function such as the process for addition, the advantageous/disadvantageous relationship may be the opposite of the above.

(20) When the MY counter exceeds a specific number, if the configuration is such that processing for changing the instruction function, such as processing for addition, is performed according to the difference between the MY counter at the time of the excess and the specific number. The larger the difference is, the more advantageous the processing for addition is, and the processing that changes the instruction function is performed (advantageous benefits are given). A configuration in which processing for changing functions is performed may be employed.

(21) The number of medals to be paid out for each minor winning combination corresponding to the pushing order bell is not limited to the above. For example, the payout number at the time of winning the first minor combination may be more or less than nine, or may be two or less, which is less than the number of bets. Also, the number of payouts for winning the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination may be 4 or more, which is more than the number of bets, or may be 2 or less, which is less than the number of bets.

(22) The lottery result of each game may include a game result in which the number of payouts is greater than the 9 coins of the first minor winning combination at the time of winning. In this case, the game result may be a push order like a push order bell, a result that a prize may be established regardless of the push order, or a result that may cause a dropout.

(23) When the MY counter reaches a specific number or when the MY counter exceeds a specific number, a process for changing the instruction function such as an addition process is performed in accordance with the game result. The difference between numbers is not limited to the above. And it is good also as composition which can reach a plurality of specific numbers by winning one result. For example, if the difference between the adjacent specific numbers is 5 or less, and the MY counter is 1 less than the specific number on the smaller side, and 6 medals are paid out due to winning the first minor combination, any specific number It can be reached, and depending on the MY counter before arrival, it is possible to cause an event such as reaching both specific numbers or reaching only one specific number. Also, in this way, for example, if the 1st minor winning combination (increase of 6 cards), both specific numbers are reached, but if the 29th minor winning combination (increase of 2 cards), one specific number It is also possible to cause an event such as reaching only

In these cases, when both specific numbers are reached, the privilege may be granted for both specific numbers (additional processing is performed), or only one (for example, a large specific number only) privilege may be provided. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which disadvantageous processing (for example, subtraction of the number of remaining games in AT mode) is performed on one side, and advantageous processing (addition of the number of remaining games) is performed on the other side, such as a change in the instruction function.

Furthermore, for example, adjacent specific numbers may be configured to be consecutive numbers. In this case, the first specific number and the second specific number may be consecutive, the first specific numbers may be consecutive, the second specific numbers may be consecutive, The second specific number may be smaller than the first specific number, and both specific numbers may be consecutive.

(24) When the MY counter reaches a specific number or when the MY counter exceeds a specific number, a process for changing the instruction function such as an addition process is performed in accordance with the game result. In the game that is perfect, the game that exceeds the specific number, and the next game, the additional processing is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the additional processing is performed after a few minutes or based on a predetermined state transition (bonus end).

(25) In a case where the MY counter reaches a specific number, the specific process may be performed if the MY counter reaches the specific number at the end of the next game. The specific process may be the same process as the process of changing the instruction function, such as the extra process performed in the previous game when the specific number was exactly achieved, or may be a different process. The different processing may be processing that is more advantageous or disadvantageous to the player than the processing of changing the instruction function such as the additional processing performed in the previous game. More specifically, for example, when the processing for addition performed when the specific number was exactly achieved in the previous game is performed, the same addition is performed when the specific number is exactly achieved at the end of the next game. It may be configured to carry out additional processing for the winning probability and the number of games to be added, or to perform processing for addition with a higher winning probability than the previous game, or processing for addition with a higher number of games than the previous game. A configuration may be adopted in which processing, additional processing with a lower additional winning probability than the previous game, or additional processing with a lower additional game count than the previous game is performed. In addition, for example, when the additional processing that was performed when the specific number was exactly achieved in the previous game is performed, if the specific number is exactly the specified number at the end of the next game, the setting value is suggested as the specific processing. A process of generating an effect or a process of displaying a rare image may be performed.

In this case, when the MY counter reaches the specific number exactly, the case where the MY counter reaches the specific number at the end of the next game means that the game result of the next game is the replay result. Alternatively, there is a winning as a result of paying out the same number as the number of bets (2nd minor winning combination to 26th minor winning combination). For example, in the case of a replay result, the above specific processing may be performed in the case of a predetermined replay result among a plurality of types of replay results, or the above specific processing may be performed for all replay results. A configuration may be adopted, or a configuration may be adopted in which the specific processing is not performed in the case of a predetermined replay result. The same applies to the case of winning as a result of paying out the same number as the number of bets. The above-described specific processing may be performed in the case of winning as a result, or may be configured not to perform the above-described specific processing in the case of winning a predetermined result. Furthermore, in the case of a replay result, the specific process is performed, but in the case of winning as a result of paying out the same number as the number of bets, the specific process may not be performed, or vice versa.

Furthermore, if the MY counter is exactly the specific number at the end of the next game, and if the MY counter is exactly the specific number at the end of the next game, the specific processing is performed. Alternatively, a specific process may be performed in each game as long as the event (an event in which the MY counter reaches a specific number) continues.

(26) Adjustment notices, especially adjustment notices corresponding to small wins and adjustment notices corresponding to results, are configured to perform adjustment notices for small wins for each game, but adjustments are made including the transition of the game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which usage notification is performed. For example, the CB state ending with 15 payouts is MY If the difference between the counter and the specific number is 13 or 25, a notification may be made that the specific number will be reached when the transition to the CB state occurs.

(27) In the configuration where the MY counter is taken over when the AT mode ends and the specific number flags and the like are erased, a configuration may be adopted in which some of the specific number flags are erased and the remaining specific number flags are not erased. For example, a configuration in which a specific number of specific number flags to which the corresponding privilege was not given (no additional processing was performed) is erased, while a specific number of specific number flags to which the corresponding privilege is given is not erased. may be Further, whether or not to clear the specific number flag may be determined by a lottery or the like, and the winning probability may differ depending on the set value, the value of the MY counter, the number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the like.

(28) In a configuration where the MY counter is taken over at the end of the AT mode and the specific number flag is cleared, the MY counter is not set until the MY counter falls below the specific number in a situation where the AT mode is not in progress. When reaches a specific number, a specific number flag is set even if it is not in the AT mode, or a privilege based on reaching the specific number is granted (additional processing is performed). good too.

(29) In a configuration in which the MY counter is taken over when the AT mode ends, and the specific number flags, etc. are deleted, the value of the advantageous section continuation counter input when the AT mode ends is the specific number of the specific number flags to be deleted and the MY counter. It is good also as a structure which is made to differ according to a difference. For example, if the specific number corresponding to the specific number flag to be cleared is 120 and the MY counter at the end of the AT mode is 140, 20 is input to the advantageous section continuation counter, and the MY counter at the end of the AT mode is entered. is 121, such as inputting 1 to the advantageous interval continuation counter, the greater the difference between the specific number of the specific number flag to be cleared and the MY counter, the larger the value to be input to the advantageous interval continuation counter. can be reduced.

(30) In the configuration where the MY counter is inherited when the AT mode ends and the specific number flags are deleted, the specific number flags may be deleted when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the advantageous section or the AT mode. . For example, if the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the transition to the AT mode is greater than a predetermined number of games, the specific number flag, etc. is erased after the AT mode ends, while if it is less than the predetermined number of games, it is not erased. may be Also, at the end of the AT mode, the number of net additions per AT mode game is calculated from the number of games played in the AT mode and the number of increased medals, and if the number of net additions is equal to or less than a predetermined number, it is deleted. A configuration may be adopted in which if the number is larger than a predetermined number, it is not erased.

(31) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(32) Although the slot machine has been described as having reels and three stop switches corresponding to them in parallel, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(33) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable (normal interval) and are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantage zone increase/decrease number MY, MY counter);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means corresponds to establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the manner notification means provides notification information (an instruction function, for example, , number of continuous AT mode games, additional win probability, number of additional games, etc.). function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. By setting the specific state in which mode notification is possible so that it can be shifted only to the advantageous state, it is possible to prevent an event in which the increase in game media exceeds the range intended by the designer as much as possible. In addition, it is possible to easily identify whether the game medium is increased due to the mode notification or whether the game medium is illegally paid out by determining whether it is in an advantageous state or a normal state. become.

In such a configuration, means for grasping a specific increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media and the number of bets after a predetermined start condition in an advantageous state is satisfied, is provided, and the specific increase/decrease number is specified. When the condition corresponds to the establishment of the condition, there is a case where a specific process for causing a change in the notification information for performing the mode notification is performed. For example, when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is much larger than the design value, it is made difficult to perform the mode instruction notification. By doing so, it is possible to easily achieve the specified increase/decrease in the number of sheets according to the design value, and if the specified increase/decrease in the number of sheets exceeds the design value, it is also possible to judge that fraudulent acts are being carried out. . Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the establishment of a specific condition makes the instruction function advantageous, it is possible to realize a game feature such as whether or not to establish the specific condition during an advantageous state. Therefore, if a specific process can be executed depending on the success or failure of a specific condition based on the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, it will be possible to adjust the increase/decrease rate of the game media well, and create new game features using it. can also be useful.

Note that "notification information" can also be called "instruction information", "mode instruction information", "instruction function", and "mode instruction function". In addition, regarding the "notification information", "ease of transition to the specific state, the number of games in the specific state, the ease of execution of the state notification by the state notification means in the specific state, or the It may also be expressed as "announcement information including the number of games in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed".

In addition, by adding the configuration "by performing the specific processing in the advantageous state, the mode notification based on the specific processing is performed in the advantageous state", the advantageous state ends when the specific processing is performed. It is clarified that it does not

Feature A2. Characteristic A1, wherein the specific condition is established when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets reaches a predetermined first specific number (for example, 200 or 500 in the first embodiment). game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets reaches the first specific number, the specific process is performed to change the notification information. Therefore, if the notification information is changed by the specific process so as to suppress the increase in the number of game media, it is possible to prevent the specific increase/decrease number of sheets from becoming too large. With a configuration in which the information changes so as to promote an increase in the number of game media, it is possible to create novel game features such as playing a game with the aim of reaching the first specific number.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number reaches a second specific number that is larger than the first specific number.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific number is reached after the first specific number is reached and the specific condition is satisfied, the specific condition is not satisfied. In other words, the specific condition is satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is between the first specific number and the second specific number, and the specific processing is performed in this situation. In this way, after the first specific number is reached, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as not exceeding the second specific number or exceeding the second specific number earlier.

In addition, the above configuration may be expressed as "the specific condition is satisfied between the first specific number and a second specific number that is larger than the first specific number". .

Feature A4. The payout means pays out a first number (three) of game media when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the winning of the first operation result is established. A second number (nine) of game media, which is larger than the first number, is dispensed when a prize is established as a result of the operation,
The game according to feature A3, wherein the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is set to be at least greater than the difference between the first number and the second number. machine.

According to the above configuration, depending on the operation mode when the specific result is won, the first operation result win is established and the first number of game media is paid out, or the second operation result win is established and the second number of game media is paid out. In a configuration in which a payout is performed, the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is at least greater than the difference between the first number and the second number. By doing so, if the specific result wins after reaching the first specific number, there is a possibility that the second specific number will be reached if the second operation result wins, but if the first operation result wins If so, it is possible to create a possibility that the second specific number will not be reached.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is set to be larger than the second number.

According to the above configuration, when winning is achieved as a specific result after reaching the first specific number, it is possible to create a possibility that the second specific number will not be reached no matter which operation result wins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific condition from becoming unsatisfied immediately after the specific condition is met, and to increase the number of situations in which the configuration using the specific increase/decrease number of sheets and the success/failure of the specific condition is applied.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is set to be larger than twice the second number.

According to the above configuration, when the specific result wins after reaching the first specific number, regardless of the specific increase/decrease number when reaching the first specific number in the second operation result winning, which operation result Even if a prize is established, it can be prevented from reaching the second specific number. Therefore, it becomes possible to do so more suitably the effect of feature A5.

In addition, the above configuration can more preferably exhibit the above effects by further limiting the following configuration.

"A payout result is set as the lottery result of the lottery means, in which game media are to be paid out by the payout means,
At least in the specific state, the probability of obtaining the specific result is set to be the highest among the payout results.

"A payout result is set as the lottery result of the lottery means, in which game media are to be paid out by the payout means,
The difference between the first specific number and the second specific number is at least greater than the sum of the maximum number of game media paid out when the payout result is won in the specific state and the second number. It is set to "configuration.

Feature A7. The specific process executing means executes the specific process so as to cause a change in the notification information when the result of the game is a special result (watermelon, cherry) in a situation where the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A6.

According to the above configuration, not only does it suffice if the specific condition based on the specific increase/decrease number of coins is satisfied, but also the game result under the condition that the specific condition is satisfied is taken into account to change the notification information. By doing so, the hurdles to changes in the notification information are increased, and it is possible to preferably increase the interest in the game using the configuration in which the advantage/disadvantage for the player changes due to the change in the notification information. .

The "game result" is, for example, "lottery result by the lottery means", "combination of symbols stopped at the effective position", or "lottery result by the lottery means and the pattern stopped at the effective position". It is also possible to express it as "a result based on a combination of

Feature A8. A special high-probability state (specific navigation mode) and a special low-probability state are set so that the probability that the result of the game will be the special result is relatively high or low,
Special transition means for transitioning from the special low-probability state to the special high-probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (a function of executing the processing of steps S1015 to S1021 by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied regardless of the specific increase/decrease number of sheets.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a change occurs in the notification information when the result of the game is a special result in a situation where the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is between the first specific number and the second specific number, the probability of a special result. are set to different states, and the state transition occurs regardless of the specific increase/decrease number of sheets. By doing so, not only the game of adjusting the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, but also the game of establishing a predetermined transition condition irrelevant to the specific increase/decrease number of sheets can be performed in parallel. is planned.

It should be noted that "the predetermined transition condition is satisfied regardless of the specific increase/decrease number of sheets" means "the predetermined transition condition does not include the specific increase/decrease number of sheets", does not include a specific increase/decrease number of sheets" or "provides determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied without considering the specific increase/decrease number of sheets" can be expressed as

Further, in the above configuration, it is provided with ``means for shifting from the special high probability state to the special low probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition'', and further, ``the predetermined termination condition is, It is possible to add a limitation such as "This holds true regardless of the specific number of increases and decreases", and by adding such a limitation, the rarity of the special high probability state is guaranteed, and the specific increase and decrease number is involved in the end condition clarifies not to.

Feature A9. A first special number (200) and a third special number (500) different from the first special number are set as the first specific number,
A second special number (250) and a fourth special number (550) different from the second special number are set as the second specific number,
The specific condition is that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is satisfied between the first special number and the second special number, and the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is satisfied between the third special number and the fourth special number. and
The specific processing executing means is configured such that, in a situation where the specific condition is established between the first special number and the second special number, the result of the game is a first special result (watermelon) among the special results. , the specific processing is executed so as to cause a change in the notification information, and in a situation where the specific condition is established between the third special number and the fourth special number, the result of the game is is a second special result (cherry) different from the first special result of the special results, the specific processing is executed so as to cause a change in the notification information, or The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific condition is satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is between the first specific number and the second specific number, the situation is between the first specific number and the second specific number. are set, and depending on the type, the result of the game that is the object of causing a change in the notification information during the situation is different. By doing so, the game can be diversified, and the playability can be improved from the viewpoint of whether the situation in which the specific condition is established occurs in the early stage or the final stage of the advantageous state.

Feature A10. A first special high-probability state (watermelon navigation mode) and a first special low-probability state are set so that the probability that the result of the game will be the first special result is relatively high or low,
First special transition means for shifting from the first special low-probability state to the first special high-probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (executing a process of setting a watermelon navigation flag by the main controller 101 function) and
A second special high-probability state (Cherry Navi mode) and a second special low-probability state are set so that the probability that the result of the game will result in the second special result is relatively high or low,
second special transition means for shifting from the second special low-probability state to the second special high-probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (processing for setting the Cherry Navi flag by the main controller 101; functions to perform) and
with
The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the predetermined first transition condition and the predetermined second transition condition are satisfied regardless of the specific increase/decrease number.

According to the above configuration, the result of a game between the first special number and the second special number is the first special result, or the result of the game between the third special number and the fourth special number is the result of the game. In the configuration in which the notification information changes when the second special result is obtained, states with different probabilities of obtaining the first special result and the second special result are set, and the transition between these states corresponds to the specific increase/decrease in the number of sheets. will occur regardless. By doing so, not only the game of adjusting the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, but also the game of establishing a predetermined first transition condition or a predetermined second transition condition unrelated to the specific increase/decrease number of sheets can be performed in parallel. It becomes possible to put it on, and it is possible to make the game more profound.

Note that "the predetermined first transition condition and the predetermined second transition condition are satisfied regardless of the specific increase/decrease number of sheets" means that "the predetermined first transition condition and the predetermined second transition condition meet the "the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is not included", "the success or failure of the predetermined first transition condition and the second predetermined transition condition does not include the specific increase/decrease number of sheets", or "the predetermined increase/decrease number of sheets is not included in the predetermined first transition condition and the A judgment means is provided for judging success or failure of the second transition condition, and the judgment means judges success or failure of the predetermined transition condition without considering the specific increase/decrease number of sheets.

Further, in the above configuration, "means for shifting from the first special high probability state to the first special low probability state based on the establishment of the predetermined first end condition" means for shifting from the second special high-probability state to the second special low-probability state based on the fact that the condition is met; is established regardless of the number of specific increases and decreases." It is clarified that the number of sheets does not matter.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the first extra-high-probability state and the second extra-high-probability state may overlap.

According to the above configuration, the first special high-probability state that is likely to result in the first special result and the second special high-probability state that is likely to result in the second special result can overlap. A special result is likely to occur. However, even if the first special result is obtained, although the notification information changes in the range of the first special number and the second special number, it does not change in the range of the third special number and the fourth special number, and the second special result. Since the relationship is the same for , even if it becomes easy to win both special results, after all, the fact that the specific increase/decrease number of coins is within a predetermined range takes precedence over the establishment of the specific condition. By doing so, it becomes clearer that the transition to the first extra-high probability state or the second extra-high probability state is independent of the specific increase/decrease number of sheets.

Feature A12. The second special number is larger than the first special number, the third special number is larger than the second special number, and the fourth special number is larger than the third special number. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features A9 to A11.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific condition is satisfied in the range from the first special number to the second special number and the specific condition is satisfied in the range from the third special number to the fourth special number, overlap occurs in both ranges. no more. In this way, if the two ranges do not overlap regarding the success or failure of a specific condition, it is possible to prevent the ball payout rate from becoming too high. If this is the case, it is possible to enjoy the game in which the specific condition is satisfied in more games in an advantageous state.

Feature A13. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the mode or rate of increase of the game media, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the set values of the plurality of stages 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A12, wherein either the first specific number or the second specific number differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of situations between the first specific number and the second specific number that satisfy the specific condition are set, the range differs depending on the set value. For example, if the configuration is advantageous when a specific condition is satisfied, the higher the set value is, the wider the range in which the specific condition is satisfied. is also possible. In addition, it is possible to play a game in which set values are predicted using such a difference in range, which can be used to improve the interest of the game.

If the above configuration is applied to feature A9, "any one of the first special number, the second special number, the third special number, and the fourth special number is set by the setting means. It can be expressed as "varies depending on the setting value".

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the second specific number is more likely to vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means, or the difference due to the setting value is greater than the first specific number. .

According to the above configuration, as the number of specific increase/decrease numbers corresponding to the increase in the number of cards in an advantageous state increases, the specific number related to the success or failure of the specific condition tends to vary depending on the setting value, and the setting difference increases when the specific number differs. By doing so, there is no difference due to the setting value in the beginning of the advantageous state, but after that, the difference due to the setting value is likely to occur. It is also possible to expect an increase in game media regardless of the set value. In addition, in a game that predicts set values, it is possible to add value to the increase in game media by using the success or failure of a specific condition, such as the more the number of specific increase/decrease numbers, the easier it is to predict. Become.

In addition, if the above configuration is applied to feature A9, "the number corresponding to the larger number among the first special number, the second special number, the third special number, and the fourth special number is smaller It may be expressed as "the setting value that is set by the setting means is more likely to vary, or the difference due to the setting value is greater than that corresponding to the number".

Feature A15. A plurality of game states are set in which one of the first specific number and the second specific number is different,
Means capable of setting one of the plurality of game states based on a predetermined trigger (function for executing mode setting processing at the start of the advantageous section by the main controller 101) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A14, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, a plurality of game states are set in which the range in which the specific condition is satisfied is different depending on the difference between the first specific number and the second specific number, and one of the game states is set based on a predetermined trigger. Since it is set, depending on which game state is set, the specific increase/decrease number of sheets that satisfies the specific condition will be different, and the specific increase/decrease number of sheets will not only increase the number of game media, but also make the user interested. It is also possible to make the player pay attention to which game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if the above configuration is applied to feature A9, "a plurality of game states in which any one of the first special number, the second special number, the third special number, and the fourth special number is different is set It is better to express it as

Feature A16. The specific process executing means executes the specific process so that the notification information changes when the result of the game is a special result (watermelon, cherry) in a situation where the specific condition is satisfied. can be,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special response result (specific replays 1 and 2) and the stop operation means is operated in the corresponding operation mode, the result of the game is the Even if a special result is obtained and the lottery result by the lottery means is the special response result, if the stop operation means is operated in a non-corresponding operation mode different from the corresponding operation mode, the game The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A15, wherein the result of (1) does not become the special result.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the result of the game when the special response result is won is a special result depends on whether the operation mode of the stop operation means is the corresponding operation mode or the non-corresponding operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to change the appearance rate of the special result without changing the probability of the lottery by the lottery means, and to obtain the special result in a situation where the specific conditions are established with a relatively simple configuration. can be made to appear.

Feature A17. The payout means pays out a first number (three) of game media when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the winning of the first operation result is established. A second number (nine) of game media, which is larger than the first number, is dispensed when a prize is established as a result of the operation,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in a situation where the specific condition is satisfied, the specific process execution means causes the mode notification by the mode notification means to correspond to the first operation mode. Alternatively, the specific process can be executed such that a specific mode notification corresponding to an operation mode that does not correspond to winning of either the first operation result or the second operation result is performed. The game machine according to any one of features A3 to A16, further comprising specific mode notification means (a function of executing a bell notification adjustment process by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific condition is satisfied between the first specific number and the second specific number, the specific mode notification at the time of winning the specific result is such that the number of payouts by the payout means does not increase as much as possible. will take place. By doing so, the specific increase/decrease number of sheets tends to stay between the first specific number and the second specific number, and it is possible to lengthen the period in which the specific condition is satisfied.

In addition, the ``specific mode notification means'' is defined as ``the specific process execution means, in a situation where the specific condition is satisfied, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, the mode notification means Specific mode notification means (function for executing bell notification adjustment processing by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific process so that the notification is performed in a specific mode different from the second operation mode )” can be expressed as

Feature A18. Characteristic A17, characterized in that the specific mode notification means is capable of executing the specific processing so that the specific mode notification is more likely to be performed as the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is closer to the second specific number. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to perform the specific mode notification so that the number of payouts by the payout means does not increase as the specific increase/decrease number approaches the second specific number. By doing so, it becomes easy to stay between the first specific number and the second specific number in a state where the number of specific increase/decrease numbers is as large as possible.

Feature A19. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result and the mode notification is performed by the mode notification means, the first operation mode is performed by notification means (instruction monitor 68) different from the predetermined notification means. and a second mode notification means (a function of executing a pushing process by the main controller 101) capable of executing mode notification including the second operation mode;
a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having the mode notification means;
with
Even if the content of the mode notification notified by the mode notification means changes due to the execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means, the notification is made by the second mode notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the content of the mode notification does not change.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration including the first control device having the lottery means directly linked to the profit of the player and the second control device having the mode notification means, the specific processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. Even if the notification information changes and the content of the mode notification by the mode notification means changes based on the change, the content of the mode notification by the second mode notification means on the first control device side does not change. By doing so, it is possible to regard the change in the mode information as a change in the performance, and it becomes possible to ensure the profit of the player while greatly improving the degree of freedom of the specific processing.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable (normal section) and are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantageous section increase/decrease number MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific increase/decrease number ascertained by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is equal to a predetermined specific number, privilege giving means (MY high probability number by main controller 101) capable of giving a privilege to the player. 2 processing), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. Further, by setting the specific state in which mode notification is possible to be shifted only to the advantageous state, it becomes a configuration in which a plurality of steps are taken until the merit of mode notification can be enjoyed, and mode notification is made. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by.

Moreover, in the above configuration, there is provided means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media and the number of bets, after a predetermined start condition in an advantageous state is established, and the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is provided. When the number equals a predetermined number, the player may be awarded a prize. Therefore, a new game is added to the game of simply causing the payout of a large number of game media in an advantageous state to adjust the specific number of increase/decrease numbers so as to match the specific number, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Regarding the ``privilege granting means capable of awarding a privilege to the player when the specified increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is equal to a predetermined specific number'', When the specific increase/decrease number ascertained by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is equal to a predetermined specific number at the time of termination, it may be expressed as "privilege granting means capable of awarding a privilege to the player."

Feature B2. The privilege providing means causes the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means in the predetermined game to be equal to the specific number when game media are paid out by the payout means in the predetermined game. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the privilege is provided when the number of the winning number is 100%.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific number of increase/decrease numbers is exactly the specific number, a condition is added that the payout of game media will be exactly the specific number. In other words, for example, when the result of the game is lost and no game media are paid out, the specific increase/decrease number is reduced by the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, and the specific number is exactly achieved. If the number of bets is set by the bet amount setting means before the start of , and the bet number is exactly the specified number, the privilege is not given. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the new game of the feature B1 within the range of the premise of the game of the slot machine that the game medium is paid out as a result of the game.

Feature B3. Specific information storage means for storing specific information indicating that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets has reached or exceeded the specific number (function for executing processing for setting various specific number flags by the main controller 101),
The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the privilege granting means grants the privilege when the specified increase/decrease number of sheets becomes equal to the specified number in a situation where the specific information is not stored. machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific information is stored when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets reaches or exceeds the specific number. If it becomes, the privilege will not be granted. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to make the specific increase/decrease number exactly the specific number, and the fun of the game to make the specific number exactly the specific number is increased.

Feature B4. After the specific state ends in the advantageous state, the advantageous state can be continued for a predetermined number of games,
When the specific state ends, means (main controller 101) for erasing the specific information stored by the specific information storage means but not erasing the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means 97).

According to the above configuration, when the specific state in which an increase in the number of game media is expected due to the mode notification ends, the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is inherited, but the specific information is erased. In other words, even if the specified increase/decrease number of sheets exceeds the specified number in a specific state, if the specified increase/decrease number of sheets decreases due to the end of the specified state and becomes less than the specified number, the specified increase/decrease number of sheets will be repeated again. It is possible to challenge to make a specific number of By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to the decrease in the specific increase/decrease number between the specific states in the advantageous state.

Feature B5. The specific increase/decrease number grasping means determines the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means for a game in which a predetermined specific bet number (three) is set by the bet amount setting means, and the bet amount. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein a difference between the number of bets set by the setting means and the number of bets is grasped as the specific increase/decrease number.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the game in which the specific bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means is grasped as the specific increase/decrease number. Also, no benefits are given. In this way, for example, in a game with a main bet number (specific bet number), it is easy to win a payout result, but with a different bet number, it is difficult to win. It is possible to suppress the disadvantage from occurring in the number game, and it is not necessary to improve the winning probability of other bet numbers in anticipation of it. Further, assuming that a predetermined fraudulent act is performed by adjusting the number of bets, it is also possible to suitably identify the predetermined fraudulent act by doing as described above.

In addition, in the above configuration, "a specific number of bets (three in the normal game state and two in the bonus state) is set as the bet amount set in the bet amount setting means according to the game state, and the specific increase/decrease The number-of-games grasping means calculates the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means for the game for which the specific bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is grasped as the specific increase/decrease number," it is possible to suitably apply to gaming machines in which the main bet number is changed according to the game state or the like.

Feature B6. The payout means pays out a first number (three) of game media when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the winning of the first operation result is established. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B5, characterized in that a second number (nine) of game media, which is larger than the first number, is paid out when a winning operation is established.

According to the above configuration, in the game property such that it is possible to receive payout of a large number of game media by the mode notification, the situation where it is better to increase the specific increase/decrease number according to the mode notification and the relationship with the specific number A scene where it is better not to comply with the state notification is generated, and it becomes possible to create a new game feature of the game using the state notification.

Feature B7. When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets becomes a special number smaller than the specific number, a special notification execution means capable of executing a special notification (adjustment notification) corresponding to the special number by a predetermined notification means. (a function of executing SMY command processing by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the situation before the specific increase/decrease number reaches the specific number at the stage of the special number smaller than the specific number. By doing so, the purpose is to play a game aimed mainly at increasing the specific increase/decrease number in situations where the number is not close to the specific number, and to make the specific number perfect when the specific number is close to the specific number. Each separate game can be preferably played, such as playing a game to play.

Feature B8. The special notification executing means determines, as the special notification, the difference between the specific number and the special number, which is the difference between the payout number by the payout means and the bet number by the bet number setting means when a predetermined game result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that it is possible to notify that it corresponds to.

According to the above configuration, when the specific increase/decrease number becomes a special number close to the specific number, the player can grasp from the special notification that the specific number will be exactly if the predetermined game result is achieved. . As a result, it is possible to intuitively understand which game result is exactly the specific number by the special notification without calculating the specific increase/decrease number. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably play a game in which the number is adjusted to a specific number.

It should be noted that the ``predetermined game result'' corresponds to ``the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result'' or ``the lottery result by the lottery means moves to a state in which a predetermined number of payouts are made. It can also be rephrased as "predetermined result".

Feature B9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which game media are to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won,
The special notification execution means determines that the difference between the specific number and the special number is the payout number of the specific payout result in which the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means is the largest among the payout results. Characteristic B7 or B8, characterized in that it is possible to execute the special notification when the special number set to be larger than the difference from the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is reached. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the special notification is made before reaching the specific number in one game result. As a result, it is possible to leave a room for adjustment so as to be exactly the specific number after the special notification is made, and to make it possible to more preferably perform a game in which the game is adjusted so as to be exactly the specific number.

Feature B10. Characteristic features B7 to B9, characterized in that the special notification execution means is capable of executing, as the special notification, a combination of game results for the specific increase/decrease number to be equal to the specific number as the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to intuitively understand what kind of combination of game results will result in exactly the specific number of games through the special notification. As a result, it becomes easier to play a game in which a specific number of pieces are exactly matched.

Feature B11. Storage means (various table storage area 182a of ROM 182) for pre-storing in a predetermined storage area a combination of game results for making the specified increase/decrease number equal to the specified number according to the difference between the specified number and the special number result combination table stored in
Characteristic B10, wherein the special notification execution means can execute the special notification based on the difference between the specific number and the special number and the combination of the game results stored in the storage means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when making a special notification, there is no need to calculate the combination of game results corresponding to the difference between the specific number and the special number from the number of payouts and the number of bets, thereby reducing the processing load. be done.

Feature B12. A first specific number and a second specific number different from the first specific number are set as the specific number,
The privilege granting means grants a first privilege as the privilege when the specified increase/decrease number of sheets becomes equal to the first specified number, and when the specified increase/decrease number of sheets becomes equal to the second specified number The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the first specific number and the second specific number are set as the specific numbers, and if the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is exactly the first specific number, the first privilege is given, and the specific number is exactly the second specific number. If so, a second privilege will be granted. In this way, if the privilege to be granted differs depending on the target specific number, it is possible to grant the privilege according to the difficulty level etc. that is suitable, and the above game characteristics using the specific increase / decrease number and the specific number It is possible to suitably enhance the interest of.

Feature B13. A plurality of game states with different specific numbers are set,
Means (function for executing mode setting processing at the start of the advantageous section by the main control device 101) capable of setting one of the plurality of game states based on a predetermined trigger is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features B1 to B12.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that there are a plurality of game states with different specific numbers, one of the game states is set based on a predetermined trigger, so any game state is set. Depending on the state, the specific number to which the specific increase/decrease number should be adjusted differs, and it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to which game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature B14. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the mode or rate of increase of the game media, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the set values of the plurality of stages 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, wherein the specific number differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a privilege is given when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is exactly the specific number, the specific number varies depending on the set value. For example, in a configuration in which the higher the set value is, the smaller the specific number tends to be, the higher the set value is, the earlier the privilege is given. In addition, it is possible to predict the set value depending on which specific number the privilege is given, and the interest is enhanced by making the game richer.

Feature B15. Result comprehension means capable of comprehending the result of the game when the specific increase/decrease number becomes equal to the specific number (function for executing the processing of steps S3909 and S3916 by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the privilege granting means can grant a different privilege according to the result ascertained by the result ascertaining means.

According to the above configuration, it is not only necessary to simply make the specific increase/decrease number exactly the specified number, but the result of the game when the specific number is exactly the specific number will be involved in the privilege given, so for example, Even with the same increase in the number of tickets, if it is difficult to win and the number is exactly the specified number, rather than the result that is easy to win is the number that is exactly the specified number. Interest is improved, and even if the remaining number up to the specific number is the increased number corresponding to the result that it is difficult to win, it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to play the game.

Feature B16. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which game media are to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won,
As the payout result, the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet number set by the bet number setting means when winning is an odd payout result (for example, a strong cherry or a weak cherry). The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized in that is set.

According to the above configuration, for example, in consideration of the specific number set as an odd number, there is a case where the specific number is not exact unless the win of the odd payout result is included. can be done.

Feature B17. An addition means capable of executing the addition processing of the specific state (function for executing processing for addition by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B16, wherein the privilege providing means performs processing to add the specific state as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is exactly set to the specific number, the additional processing of the specific state is performed as a privilege. In order to make the specific number exactly, for example, in a specific state, there are cases where it is possible to intentionally drop out or pay out a small number of sheets. By doing so, it is possible to give a sufficient profit in return, and it is possible to favorably improve the game playability.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific increase/decrease number (advantageous section increase/decrease) that is the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means after a predetermined start condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means a specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by the main controller 101) for calculating the number of sheets MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on a specific condition established by using the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means and the game result of the game. (Function to execute additional processing by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media after the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the number of bets, is grasped, and the specific increase/decrease number and the game result of each game are used. As a result, a privilege advantageous to the player may be granted. By doing so, the start operation means is operated to start the game, a lottery for the game is performed, and by operating the stop operation means, the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the game is stopped to win a prize. is established, and the game medium is paid out. It is possible to realize a game property such as not only. More specifically, according to the above configuration, for example, in relation to awarding of benefits, a situation arises in which it is preferable not to increase the number of game media, and a game result itself of one game is not desirable for the player, and benefits are provided. It is possible to realize a novel game property that has not existed in the past. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C2. The specific condition is established when the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means satisfies the first condition and the game result satisfies the second condition. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature C1. In other words, even if the specific increase/decrease number satisfies the first condition, if the game result does not satisfy the second condition, the specific condition is not established, and the game result satisfies the second condition. However, if the specific increase/decrease number does not satisfy the first condition, the specific condition is not satisfied.

Feature C3. Excess identification means capable of identifying that the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means has exceeded a predetermined specific number (function for executing MY high probability second processing by main controller 101) with
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the first condition is satisfied based on a specified result by the excess specifying means.

According to the above configuration, the first condition is satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets exceeds the specific number. In this case, not only does it suffice if the specific increase/decrease number exceeds the specific number, but also whether or not a privilege is given depends on the game result of the game on the side of the second condition. By doing so, it is possible to realize a completely different game property from the conventional game property, such as aiming to obtain a large number of game media by increasing the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, and to improve interest.

Feature C4. The second condition is satisfied when the payout means pays out game media equal to or greater than the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means as a result of playing the game,
When the excess identification means identifies that the specific increase/decrease number exceeds the specific number, and when the game result of the game is the first game result, the bonus granting means provides the first bonus as the bonus. When the game result of the game is a second game result different from the first game result, it is possible to provide a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege as the privilege. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the result of exceeding the specific number is the second game result rather than the first game result, a privilege is given that is more advantageous for the player. is preferable to the second game result. Therefore, in a game having a first game result and a second game result as the result of each game, for example, in terms of the number of game media paid out at the time of winning in each game, the first game result is more likely than the second game result. However, when the specified number is exceeded, the second game result is more preferable than the first game result. Even if the first game result and the second game result are the same, if the number of game media or the like exceeds a specific number, it is possible to cause a difference in the degree of advantage between the first game result and the second game result. Furthermore, if the number of game media paid out at the time of winning in each game is more favorable than the first game result, the difference will be more remarkable when the specific number is exceeded. can do. Therefore, it is possible to create novel gameplay by using the relationship with the specific number.

Feature C5. The first game result is a result of paying out a first number (9) of game media by the payout means,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the second game result is a result of paying out a second number of game media, which is smaller than the first number, by the payout means.

Comparing the first game result and the second game result, the number of game media paid out is larger in the first game result than in the second game result. Results are preferred. On the other hand, in the above-described configuration, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given to the player if the result is the second game result when the specific number is exceeded. The game result is more favorable. Moreover, since the second game result is preferable only when the specific number is exceeded, it is possible to aim at increasing the number of game media. Also, it is possible to create a novel game property such that a smaller number of payouts is better at the timing when the specific number is exceeded.

The specific configuration of the above configuration is as follows.

"As the lottery results of the lottery means, a first result (bell) in which the payout means pays out a first number (nine) of game media when a prize is won, and a first result (bell) in which the payout means pays out the game media of the first number (9) in the case of a win, and A second result (strong watermelon) in which a second number (five) of game media, which is less than one, is paid out is set,
When the excess identification means identifies that the specific increase/decrease number exceeds the specific number, the privilege granting means regards the game result of winning the first result as the first game result. Characteristic feature C4, characterized in that it is possible to grant the first privilege and grant the second privilege as the second game result when the game result of the game is a winning of the second result. game machine".

Feature C6. The first game result is a result that occurs when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result,
The second game result is a result that occurs when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result,
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result is lower than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning is low, and if a specific number is exceeded in a so-called rare role, an advantageous privilege is given. By doing so, it is possible to balance the probability of winning and the privilege to be given.

Feature C7. Even if the game result of the game is the second game result, if the second game result does not exceed the specific number, the second privilege is not given. The gaming machine according to any one of C6.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the second game result is meaningful precisely because it occurs when the specific number is exceeded. Therefore, for example, in the case where the second game result is a result of a small payout number, as in the feature C5, the second game result is usually an unfavorable phenomenon in the game property aiming to increase the specific increase/decrease number of sheets. becomes more understandable.

Feature C8. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which game media are paid out by the payout means when a prize is won,
Even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the payout means does not pay out the game medium if the payout result is not established, and the second condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7.

According to the above configuration, it is not enough that the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the payout result as the game result of the game, and it is necessary that the winning is established and the payout occurs. In other words, even if the payout result is won in a situation close to the specific number, the specific number will not be exceeded unless the winning is established, so no benefit will be given. By doing so, the start operation means is operated to start the game, the lottery for the game is performed by the lottery means, and the stop operation means is operated to stop the pattern according to the lottery result of the game. It is possible to provide a privilege in relation to a specific increase/decrease number of sheets without spoiling the real thrill of a so-called slot machine, such as aiming for a prize.

In particular, since a privilege is given according to the game result of the game when the game exceeds the limit, if the game lottery result is not what the player wants, the operation mode of the stop operation means should be devised. By avoiding winning, it is possible to avoid exceeding a specific number in the game, and the player can select a game in which the specific number is exceeded, thereby improving interest through participation in the game. .

In addition, as a specific configuration of the configuration in which "even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the winning of the payout result may not be established", "the drive control means is the lottery means When the lottery result by is the payout result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, each lap so as to stop the pattern combination corresponding to the payout result at the effective position When the body is stopped and the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the payout result is not stopped at the effective position. or, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the drive control means stops the pattern combination corresponding to the payout result at the valid position at a timing that can stop. When the stop operation means is operated, each revolving body is stopped so as to stop the pattern combination corresponding to the payout result at the effective position, and the pattern combination corresponding to the payout result is placed at the effective position. When the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which it is impossible to stop, each of the revolving bodies is stopped so as not to stop the pattern combination corresponding to the payout result at the effective position.

Feature C9. A first specific number and a second specific number different from the first specific number are set as the specific number,
The privilege granting means is provided when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is the first specific number and the first condition is satisfied, and when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is the second specific number and the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C8, wherein different benefits can be awarded even if the second condition is satisfied with the same game result.

According to the above configuration, the first specific number and the second specific number are set as the specific numbers, and the game is performed depending on whether the specific increase/decrease number is the first specific number or the second specific number. Even if the game results are the same, different benefits can be given. In this way, if the privilege to be given differs depending on the target specific number, it becomes possible to give benefits according to the difficulty of reaching the specific number or exceeding it as in feature C2. , it is possible to favorably enhance the amusement of the game property using the specific increase/decrease number and the specific number.

Feature C10. When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets exceeds the specific number and the first condition is satisfied, the privilege granting means provides a more advantageous privilege as the difference between the specific increase/decrease number exceeding the specific number and the specific number is smaller. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C9, characterized in that it is easy to give or to give benefits.

According to the above configuration, the smaller the difference between the specific number and the specific increase/decrease number at the time when the specific number is exceeded, the more advantageous privilege is granted or the privilege is easier to be granted. In other words, when the number of payouts exceeds a specific number as a result of a game with a small number of payouts, the difference at the time of excess tends to be smaller than when the number of payouts exceeds a specific number, and a result with a small number of payouts is preferable. configuration. As a result, with the aim of increasing the number of game media, it is premised that it is preferable to receive more payouts, but at the timing when the specified number is exceeded, a smaller number of payouts is better. It becomes possible to

Feature C11. A predetermined payout result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out by the payout means when a prize is won,
When the predetermined payout result wins and the specific increase/decrease number exceeds the specific number and the first condition is met, the privilege granting means selects the specific increase/decrease number exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the smaller the difference from the specific number, the more advantageous privilege is given or the easier it is to give the privilege.

According to the above configuration, even if the game result of the game is the same, it is advantageous if the difference between the specific number and the specific increase/decrease number when the specific number is exceeded is smaller. By doing so, not only the game itself that exceeds the specific number, but also the elements of the game before the specific number is exceeded will be involved in the privilege, and the game will be enriched.

Feature C12. The first condition is that the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is between a predetermined first specific number and a second specific number larger than the first specific number. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number that satisfies the first condition varies from the first specific number to the second specific number. By doing so, the difficulty of the game that establishes the specific condition by using the specific increase/decrease number of sheets and the lottery result of the game is also lowered, the hurdles for enjoying the game are lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Feature C13. A specific state (watermelon navigation mode, cherry navigation mode) is set in which the lottery result by the lottery means tends to satisfy the second condition,
Specific transition means (navi mode navigation mode by main controller 101) that shifts to the specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, and terminates the specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition A gaming machine according to feature C12, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied changes depending on whether or not the specific state is such that the second condition is likely to be satisfied. By changing the easiness of establishment of the specific condition using the lottery result of (1), it is possible to improve the interest of the game with a simple configuration.

Feature C14. The gaming machine according to feature C13, wherein the predetermined transition condition is established using a lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the specific state in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as the result of the lottery by the lottery means is caused by using the result of the lottery by the lottery means. In this way, by collecting the information that changes according to the lottery result by the lottery means into the second condition, the specific condition that is established using the first condition and the second condition can be made easier to understand. Therefore, it is possible to encourage participation in the game through the simplification of the game.

Feature C15. The second condition is that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (cherry replay, watermelon play) in which the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means does not change. The game machine according to any one of the characterizing features C12 to C14.

According to the above configuration, there is no complication of the game such that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is changed in order to satisfy the second condition, and the success or failure of the first condition is not affected. It is possible to make the game simpler.

Feature C16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable (normal interval) and are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantageous section increase/decrease number MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means exceeds a predetermined upper limit number of sheets, the upper limit end means for ending the advantageous state (a function of executing the section display second process by the main controller 101) )When,
Excess identification means (MY height by main controller 101) capable of identifying that the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is less than the upper limit number of sheets and exceeds a predetermined specific number a function of executing the second processing for probability);
When it is specified by the excess specification means that the specified increase/decrease number exceeds the specified number, the privilege granting means (addition by the main controller 101) capable of granting a privilege to the player according to the result of the game function to execute processing for
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. Further, by setting the specific state in which mode notification is possible to be shifted only to the advantageous state, it becomes a configuration in which a plurality of steps are taken until the merit of mode notification can be enjoyed, and mode notification is made. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by.

Moreover, in the above configuration, there is provided means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media and the number of bets, after a predetermined start condition in an advantageous state is established, and the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is provided. Since the advantageous state is terminated when the upper limit number of sheets is exceeded, the specific state is also terminated based on that, and it is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the increase in the game media exceeds the design value. It's becoming

Here, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of sheets is set as described above, there is concern that the game will become monotonous such that the purpose is simply to continue the advantageous state or the specific state until the upper limit number is reached. be. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the number exceeds a specific number that is set to be less than the upper limit, the player may be given a privilege according to the game result at the time of exceeding. Therefore, the process of reaching the upper limit number of sheets is more emphasized, and the monotonousness of the game is avoided. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Feature C17. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable (normal interval) and are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantageous section increase/decrease number MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
Excess identification means capable of identifying that the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means has exceeded a predetermined specific number (function for executing MY high probability second processing by main controller 101) When,
When it is specified by the excess specifying means that the specified increase/decrease number of sheets exceeds the specified number, a privilege is given to the player according to the difference between the specified increase/decrease number of sheets and the specified number when exceeding the specified number. A privilege granting means (function for executing processing for addition by the main control device 101),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. Further, by setting the specific state in which mode notification is possible to be shifted only to the advantageous state, it becomes a configuration in which a plurality of steps are taken until the merit of mode notification can be enjoyed, and mode notification is made. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by.

Moreover, in the above configuration, there is provided means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number of sheets, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media and the number of bets, after a predetermined start condition in an advantageous state is established, and the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is provided. When the specific number is exceeded, a privilege is given according to the difference between the specific increase/decrease number and the specific number at the time when the specific number is exceeded. In this way, a game of exceeding a specific number is added to a game that simply aims to increase the number of game media in an advantageous state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the configuration defined by the features C1 to C15 may be applied individually to the feature C16 or the feature C17, or may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable (normal section) and are set,
Specific condition determination means (MY high-probability second function to perform processing) and
When the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established, a privilege granting means (a function of executing processing for addition by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege advantageous to the player;
with
A game characterized in that the specific condition is more likely to be established when a predetermined state in which the mode notification is not performed is interposed between the specific states than when one of the specific states continues. machine.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. Further, by setting the specific state in which mode notification is possible to be shifted only to the advantageous state, it becomes a configuration in which a plurality of steps are taken until the merit of mode notification can be enjoyed, and mode notification is made. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by.

However, if the specific state in which the state notification is performed in the advantageous state continues endlessly, the ball payout rate increases. Therefore, the user cannot enjoy the game for a long time. Therefore, the specific state in which mode notification is performed in an advantageous state continues through a predetermined state in which mode notification is not performed, thereby suppressing the increase speed of the game medium and making it possible to enjoy the game for a long time. Become. On the other hand, there are also needs of players who do not like the reduction of game media through such a predetermined state, and it becomes difficult to meet the various needs of players.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific condition is more likely to be established when the predetermined state is intervened than when it is not intervened, and a privilege is given to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. While satisfying the needs of the player who wants to enjoy the game for a long time, it is possible to suppress the decline of the player's desire to play due to the decrease in the game medium during the predetermined state due to the merit of intervening the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to meet the various needs of the players and improve the interest in the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the longer the predetermined state continues, the easier it is for the specific condition to be satisfied.

As the predetermined state between the specific states is longer, there is a concern that the player's desire to play will decrease. It becomes possible to suppress the attenuation of the desire to play.

Feature D3. A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition for the advantageous state is established. Equipped with specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main control device 101) for calculating (Advantageous section increase/decrease number MY),
The predetermined state is a configuration in which the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is more likely to decrease than the specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the specific condition is more likely to be established as the specific increase/decrease number decreases in the predetermined state.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied as the game medium decreases in the predetermined state. Ease will change. If the game result of each game in a predetermined state is not favorable to the player (the number of game media is reduced), the privilege is more likely to be given, so that the dissatisfaction of the player can be directly resolved. can be configured.

Feature D4. The number of occurrences of the specific situation in which the specific condition can be established is higher when a predetermined state in which the state notification is not performed is interposed between the specific states than when one of the specific states continues. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it has a configuration in which the number increases.

According to the above configuration, the presence of the predetermined state increases the number of situations in which the specific condition can be established, and as a result, the specific condition is likely to be established. By doing so, there is no need to use a complicated configuration such as changing the success/failure table of the specific condition depending on whether or not the specific condition is intervened, thereby changing the probability of the establishment of the specific condition. It is possible to change the easiness of establishment of the specific condition depending on the presence or absence.

Feature D5. Specific storage means for specifying that the specific situation has occurred in the specific state and storing the specified information as specific information (executing the process of setting various specific number flags and specific number done flags by the main control unit 101 function),
In the specific state, when the specific information is stored, the specific condition is not satisfied,
Characteristic D4 characterized by comprising means for erasing the specific information (function for executing the number-of-games management process of FIG. 97 by the main controller 101) when the specific state is shifted to the predetermined state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not reestablished by storing the specific information during the same specific state, but is reestablished through the predetermined state. By doing so, it is possible to realize the ease of establishment of the specific condition by the presence or absence of the intervention of the predetermined state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific condition is easily satisfied by interposing a predetermined state between the specific states, the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined state, so the privilege is given in the predetermined state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such that the game is not shifted to a specific state again even though it is played, and it is possible to clarify that the game is aimed at a specific state even if a predetermined state is intervened, making it possible to make the game easier to understand. Become.

Feature D7. A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantageous section increase/decrease number MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculation means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
When the specific increase/decrease number of sheets grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means exceeds a predetermined upper limit number of sheets, the upper limit end means for ending the advantageous state (a function of executing the section display second process by the main controller 101) )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the continuation of the specific state increases the possibility of termination by the upper limit termination means, and the significance of interposing the predetermined state between the specific states becomes more significant. Increased.

Feature D8. It is determined that the specific condition is established by the specific condition determining means, and the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, so that the specific condition that triggered the granting of the privilege is that the privilege is not granted. characteristics D1 to D7 characterized by being less likely to be established than when the number of AT mode games is added (the number of games in the advantageous section increased or decreased MY is less likely to be less than the specific number that triggered the addition). The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, when the special condition is met and the privilege is granted, the special condition is less likely to be met. , it is possible to prevent the advantage of the player from becoming too high due to the provision of the privilege.

Feature D9. An addition means capable of executing the specific state addition processing (function for executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the privilege granting means performs processing to add the specific state as the privilege.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature D8. That is, when the specific condition is established during the specific state, the specific state is added to the process as a privilege, so the specific state is likely to continue, and the room for the predetermined state to intervene is reduced. In other words, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific condition becomes less likely to be satisfied thereafter.

Feature D10. A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state Specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by main controller 101) for calculating (advantageous section increase/decrease number MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the specific condition is established based on the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to create a new game feature such as establishing a specific condition and obtaining a privilege by increasing or decreasing the number of game media in an advantageous state. In addition, rather than continuing the specific state and increasing the game medium, a predetermined state intervenes between the specific states to temporarily suppress the increase in the game medium or decrease the game medium. This makes it easier to give benefits, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining as a result, while suppressing the increase speed of the game media.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56, 57);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific increase/decrease number (advantageous section increase/decrease) that is the difference between the number of game media paid out by the payout means after a predetermined start condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means a specific increase/decrease number calculation means (function for executing MY update processing by the main controller 101) for calculating the number of sheets MY);
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculating means (a function of executing MY update processing by the main controller 101);
A privilege that is advantageous to a player based on a specific condition established by using the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means and the lottery result by the lottery means. Giving means (function for executing additional processing by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number, which is the difference between the number of payouts of game media after the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the number of bets, is grasped, and the specific increase/decrease number and the lottery means performed in each game are determined. Benefits advantageous to the player may be granted based on specific conditions established using the lottery results. By doing so, the start operation means is operated to start the game, a lottery for the game is performed, and by operating the stop operation means, the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the game is stopped to win a prize. is established and the game medium is paid out, so that it is sufficient not only to increase the number of game medium but also to obtain an advantageous lottery result of the game. It is possible to realize a game property such as not only playing, but also to improve the enjoyment of the slot machine. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature E2. The specific condition is established when the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means satisfies a first condition and the lottery result by the lottery means satisfies a second condition. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E1. In other words, even if the specific increase/decrease number satisfies the first condition, if the lottery result of the game does not satisfy the second condition, the specific condition is not established, and the lottery result of the game satisfies the second condition. However, if the specific increase/decrease number does not satisfy the first condition, the specific condition is not satisfied.

Feature E3. The first condition is that the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is between a predetermined first specific number and a second specific number larger than the first specific number. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the specific increase/decrease number that satisfies the first condition varies from the first specific number to the second specific number. By doing so, the difficulty of the game that establishes the specific condition by using the specific increase/decrease number of sheets and the lottery result of the game is also lowered, the hurdles for enjoying the game are lowered, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Feature E4. A specific state (watermelon navigation mode, cherry navigation mode) is set in which the lottery result by the lottery means tends to satisfy the second condition,
Specific transition means (navi mode navigation mode by main controller 101) that shifts to the specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, and terminates the specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied changes depending on whether or not the specific state is such that the second condition is likely to be satisfied. By changing the easiness of establishment of the specific condition using the lottery result of (1), it is possible to improve the interest of the game with a simple configuration.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the predetermined transition condition is established using a lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the specific state in which the second condition is more likely to be satisfied as the result of the lottery by the lottery means is caused by using the result of the lottery by the lottery means. In this way, by collecting the information that changes according to the lottery result by the lottery means into the second condition, the specific condition that is established using the first condition and the second condition can be made easier to understand. Therefore, it is possible to encourage participation in the game through the simplification of the game.

Feature E6. The second condition is that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (cherry replay, watermelon play) in which the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means does not change. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features E3 to E5.

According to the above configuration, there is no complication of the game such that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is changed in order to satisfy the second condition, and the success or failure of the first condition is not affected. It is possible to make the game simpler.

Feature E7. The first condition is satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number of sheets grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means is equal to or greater than a predetermined specific number, and the second condition is that the specific increase/decrease number of sheets is equal to or more than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that it is established based on the result of the game when .

According to the above configuration, the first condition is satisfied when the specific increase/decrease number is equal to or greater than the specific number, and the second condition is satisfied based on the result of the game when the specific number is equal to or greater than the specific number. The game in which the number exceeds the specified number is concentrated on the success or failure of the specified condition, making it easier to attract attention to the key part of the game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. .

Feature E8. Characteristic feature E7, wherein the second condition is satisfied when a result of a game in which the specific number of increased/decreased numbers is equal to or greater than the specific number is a result in which the specific number of increased/decreased numbers is the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the second condition is satisfied if the result of the game when the specific number of increased/decreased coins is equal to or greater than the specific number is exactly the specific number. By doing so, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as adjusting the lottery result of the game and the presence or absence of winning so that the specific increase/decrease number is exactly the specific number.

Feature E9. A plurality of stages of set values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the mode or rate of increase of the game media, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the set values of the plurality of stages 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The first condition is different between when the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set, but the second condition is common. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, while the first condition that is satisfied based on the specific increase/decrease number of sheets differs depending on the set value, the second condition that is satisfied based on the lottery results of the lottery means is common. By doing so, it is possible to provide a setting difference in the success or failure of the specific condition only by adjusting the first condition without using a configuration such as changing the lottery table according to the set value.

Feature E10. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means including the first operation mode or the second operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification means (by the main controller 101 a function of executing a push order process and a function of executing a push order notification process by the display control device 81),
When the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the notification information (instruction function, for example, the number of continuous AT mode games, the probability of additional winning, the number of additional games, etc.) for the mode notification means to perform the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that the change is advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning of a specific result in which the winning result may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is instructed. By having the player perform an operation according to the operation mode, it is possible to give different benefits to the player. Then, when the specific condition using the specific increase/decrease number and the lottery result of the game is satisfied, the mode information for performing the mode notification changes to be advantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to add the game property of establishing a specific condition based on the specific increase/decrease number of sheets and the lottery result of the game to the game property of adjusting the profit for the player by the mode notification. A novel game is created by the fusion of the game.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media;
bet amount setting means for recognizing that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
mode notification means capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
An advantageous state in which a transition to a specific state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executable and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executable are set,
A specific increase/decrease number that is the difference between the payout number of game media paid out by the payout means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means after a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the advantageous state a specific increase/decrease number calculation means for calculating
a specific increase/decrease number grasping means for grasping the specific increase/decrease number calculated by the specific increase/decrease number calculation means;
When the specific increase/decrease number grasped by the specific increase/decrease number grasping means corresponds to establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the mode notification means causes a change in notification information for performing the state notification. a specific process executing means for executing a specific process for
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images